// dear imgui, v1.73
// (widgets code)

/*

Index of this file:

// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.)
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.

*/

#ifdef DBG_NEW
#undef new
#endif

#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#endif

#include "imgui.h"
#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#endif
#include "imgui_internal.h"

#include <ctype.h>      // toupper
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
#else
#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
#endif

#include <algorithm>

// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#endif

// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#if defined(__clang__)
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"         // warning : use of old-style cast                              // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"            // warning : comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe   // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"      // warning : format string is not a string literal              // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"        // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness             //
#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning : zero as null pointer constant              // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
#endif
#if __has_warning("-Wdouble-promotion")
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"       // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
#endif
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                  // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"        // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"          // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Data
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them
static constexpr signed char    IM_S8_MIN  = -128;
static constexpr signed char    IM_S8_MAX  = 127;
static constexpr unsigned char  IM_U8_MIN  = 0;
static constexpr unsigned char  IM_U8_MAX  = 0xFF;
static constexpr signed short   IM_S16_MIN = -32768;
static constexpr signed short   IM_S16_MAX = 32767;
static constexpr unsigned short IM_U16_MIN = 0;
static constexpr unsigned short IM_U16_MAX = 0xFFFF;
static constexpr ImS32          IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN;    // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
static constexpr ImS32          IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX;    // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
static constexpr ImU32          IM_U32_MIN = 0;
static constexpr ImU32          IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX;   // (0xFFFFFFFF)
#ifdef LLONG_MIN
static constexpr ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN;  // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
static constexpr ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX;  // (9223372036854775807ll);
#else
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
static const ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
#endif
static constexpr ImU64          IM_U64_MIN = 0;
#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
static constexpr ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
#else
static const ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
#endif

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// For InputTextEx()
static bool             InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data);
static int              InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end);
static ImVec2           InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TextUnformatted()
// - Text()
// - TextV()
// - TextColored()
// - TextColoredV()
// - TextDisabled()
// - TextDisabledV()
// - TextWrapped()
// - TextWrappedV()
// - LabelText()
// - LabelTextV()
// - BulletText()
// - BulletTextV()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImGuiTextFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(text != NULL);
    const char* text_begin = text;
    if (text_end == NULL)
        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT

    const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
    const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
    const bool wrap_enabled = (wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f);
    if (text_end - text > 2000 && !wrap_enabled)
    {
        // Long text!
        // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
        // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
        // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line.
        // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop.
        const char* line = text;
        const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
        ImVec2 text_size(0,0);

        // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
        ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
        if (!g.LogEnabled)
        {
			const int lines_skippable = (int)((window->ClipRect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
            if (lines_skippable > 0)
            {
                int lines_skipped = 0;
                while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable)
                {
					auto line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                    if (!line_end)
                        line_end = text_end;
                    if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                        text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                    line = line_end + 1;
                    lines_skipped++;
                }
                pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
            }
        }

        // Lines to render
        if (line < text_end)
        {
            ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
            while (line < text_end)
            {
                if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0, false))
                    break;

				auto line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
                line = line_end + 1;
                line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
                line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
                pos.y += line_height;
            }

            // Count remaining lines
            int lines_skipped = 0;
            while (line < text_end)
            {
				auto line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
                if (!line_end)
                    line_end = text_end;
                if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
                    text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
                line = line_end + 1;
                lines_skipped++;
            }
            pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
        }
        text_size.y = (pos - text_pos).y;

		const ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0);
    }
    else
    {
        const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
        const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);

		const ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
        ItemSize(text_size);
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
        RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
    }
}

void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end)
{
    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::Text(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextV(const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const char* text_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    TextEx(g.TempBuffer, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
}

void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GImGui->Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    PopStyleColor();
}

void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
	const bool need_backup = (window->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f);  // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set
    if (need_backup)
        PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    if (need_backup)
        PopTextWrapPos();
}

void ImGui::LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect value_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2));
    const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f), style.FramePadding.y*2) + label_size);
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    const char* value_text_begin = &g.TempBuffer[0];
    const char* value_text_end = value_text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
}

void ImGui::BulletText(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    BulletTextV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const char* text_begin = g.TempBuffer;
    const char* text_end = text_begin + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
    const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
    const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x*2) : 0.0f), ImMax(line_height, label_size.y)));  // Empty text doesn't add padding
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
	const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f), text_col);
    RenderText(bb.Min+ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2, text_base_offset_y), text_begin, text_end, false);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Main
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal]
// - Button()
// - SmallButton()
// - InvisibleButton()
// - ArrowButton()
// - CloseButton() [Internal]
// - CollapseButton() [Internal]
// - ScrollbarEx() [Internal]
// - Scrollbar() [Internal]
// - Image()
// - ImageButton()
// - Checkbox()
// - CheckboxFlags()
// - RadioButton()
// - ProgressBar()
// - Bullet()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// The ButtonBehavior() function is key to many interactions and used by many/most widgets.
// Because we handle so many cases (keyboard/gamepad navigation, drag and drop) and many specific behavior (via ImGuiButtonFlags_),
// this code is a little complex.
// By far the most common path is interacting with the Mouse using the default ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease button behavior.
// See the series of events below and the corresponding state reported by dear imgui:
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClickRelease:             return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse is outside bb)        -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+1 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+5 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+8 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnClick:                    return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnRelease:                  return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// with PressedOnDoubleClick:              return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
//   Frame N+1 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+4 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
//   Frame N+5 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Note that some combinations are supported,
// - PressedOnDragDropHold can generally be associated with any flag.
// - PressedOnDoubleClick can be associated by PressedOnClickRelease/PressedOnRelease, in which case the second release event won't be reported.
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
// The behavior of the return-value changes when ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat is set:
//                                         Repeat+                  Repeat+           Repeat+             Repeat+
//                                         PressedOnClickRelease    PressedOnClick    PressedOnRelease    PressedOnDoubleClick
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -                        true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay                  true                     true              -                   true
//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
//   Frame N + RepeatDelay + RepeatRate*N   true                     true              -                   true
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled)
    {
        if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = false;
        if (out_held) *out_held = false;
        if (g.ActiveId == id) ClearActiveID();
        return false;
    }

    // Default behavior requires click+release on same spot
    if ((flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick)) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;

    ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
    const bool flatten_hovered_children = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredRootWindow == window;
    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = window;

#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
    if (id != 0 && window->DC.LastItemId != id)
        ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, bb, id);
#endif

    bool pressed = false;
    bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id);

    // Drag source doesn't report as hovered
    if (hovered && g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover))
        hovered = false;

    // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
    if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
        if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
        {
            hovered = true;
            SetHoveredID(id);
            if (CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f, g.HoveredIdTimer + 0.0001f - g.IO.DeltaTime, 0.01f, 0.70f)) // FIXME: Our formula for CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount() is fishy
            {
                pressed = true;
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
        }

    if (flatten_hovered_children)
        g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;

    // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one.
    if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap) && (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0))
        hovered = false;

    // Mouse
    if (hovered)
    {
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt))
        {
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
            {
                SetActiveID(id, window);
                if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                    SetFocusID(id, window);
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
            if (((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
            {
                pressed = true;
                if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID)
                    ClearActiveID();
                else
                    SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) && g.IO.MouseReleased[0])
            {
                if (!((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay))  // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
                    pressed = true;
                ClearActiveID();
            }

            // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
            // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.ActiveId == id && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[0] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(0, true))
                pressed = true;
        }

        if (pressed)
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
    }

    // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
    // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
    if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnNav))
            hovered = true;

    if (g.NavActivateDownId == id)
    {
		const bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
		const bool nav_activated_by_inputs = IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) ? ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat : ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs)
            pressed = true;
        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs || g.ActiveId == id)
        {
            // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
            g.NavActivateId = id; // This is so SetActiveId assign a Nav source
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            if ((nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs) && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                SetFocusID(id, window);
            g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
        }
    }

    bool held = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (pressed)
            g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = true;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
        {
            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
                g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;
            if (g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            {
                held = true;
            }
            else
            {
                if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) && !g.DragDropActive)
                {
					const bool is_double_click_release = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseDownWasDoubleClick[0];
					const bool is_repeating_already = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[0] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
                    if (!is_double_click_release && !is_repeating_already)
                        pressed = true;
                }
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
                g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
        }
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        {
            if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
                ClearActiveID();
        }
    }

    if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered;
    if (out_held) *out_held = held;

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
        pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
	const ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);

    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
    RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);

    // Automatically close popups
    //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
    //    CloseCurrentPopup();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, 0);
}

// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char* label)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
	const float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
	const bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
    g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
    return pressed;
}

// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size.
    IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f);

    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
	const ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, const ImGuiDir dir, const ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    ItemSize(size, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);

    // Render
    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, bg_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), text_col, dir);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char* str_id, const ImGuiDir dir)
{
	const float sz = GetFrameHeight();
    return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), 0);
}

// Button to close a window
bool ImGui::CloseButton(const ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)//, float size)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Validate sequence close a window.
    // (this isn't the regular behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user much because navigation tends to keep items visible).
    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
	const bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id);

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (is_clipped)
        return pressed;

    // Render
	const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered);
    ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
    if (hovered)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f), col, 12);

	const float cross_extent = g.FontSize * 0.5f * 0.7071f - 1.0f;
	const ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,+cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,-cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent,-cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent,+cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::CollapseButton(const ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

	const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
    ItemAdd(bb, id);
    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);

    // Render
	const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
	const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
	const ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
    if (hovered || held)
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center/*+ ImVec2(0.0f, -0.5f)*/, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, bg_col, 12);
    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, text_col, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);

    // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
    if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging())
        StartMouseMovingWindow(window);

    return pressed;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImGuiAxis axis)
{
    return window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(axis == ImGuiAxis_X ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
}

// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar
// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
// Still, the code should probably be made simpler..
bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb_frame, const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiAxis axis, float* p_scroll_v, const float size_avail_v, const float size_contents_v,
                        const ImDrawCornerFlags rounding_corners)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const float bb_frame_width = bb_frame.GetWidth();
    const float bb_frame_height = bb_frame.GetHeight();
    if (bb_frame_width <= 0.0f || bb_frame_height <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the resize grab)
    float alpha = 1.0f;
    if ((axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) && bb_frame_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)
        alpha = ImSaturate((bb_frame_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    if (alpha <= 0.0f)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);
    const bool horizontal = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X);

    ImRect bb = bb_frame;
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp((float)(int)((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp((float)(int)((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));

    // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
    const float scrollbar_size_v = horizontal ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();

    // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
    // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
    IM_ASSERT(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
    const float win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v), 1.0f);
    const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * (size_avail_v / win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
    const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;

    // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
    bool held = false;
    bool hovered = false;
    ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);

	const float scroll_max = ImMax(1.0f, size_contents_v - size_avail_v);
    float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(*p_scroll_v / scroll_max);
    float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
    if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
    {
		const float scrollbar_pos_v = horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y;
		const float mouse_pos_v = horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;

        // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
        const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
        SetHoveredID(id);

        bool seek_absolute = false;
        if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
        {
            // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
            seek_absolute = (clicked_v_norm < grab_v_norm || clicked_v_norm > grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm);
            if (seek_absolute)
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f;
            else
                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
        }

        // Apply scroll
        // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of ContentSize and before setting up our starting position
        const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter - grab_h_norm * 0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
        *p_scroll_v = (float)(int)(0.5f + scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);//(win_size_contents_v - win_size_v));

        // Update values for rendering
        scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(*p_scroll_v / scroll_max);
        grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;

        // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
        if (seek_absolute)
            g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
    }

    // Render
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_frame.Min, bb_frame.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg), window->WindowRounding, rounding_corners);
    const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha);
    ImRect grab_rect;
    if (horizontal)
        grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, bb.Max.y);
    else
        grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);

    return held;
}

void ImGui::Scrollbar(const ImGuiAxis axis)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImGuiID id = GetScrollbarID(window, axis);
    KeepAliveID(id);

    // Calculate scrollbar bounding box
    const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect();
    const ImRect inner_rect = window->InnerRect;
    const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
    const float scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis ^ 1];
    IM_ASSERT(scrollbar_size > 0.0f);
    const float other_scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis];
    ImDrawCornerFlags rounding_corners = (other_scrollbar_size <= 0.0f) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight : 0;
    ImRect bb;
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
    {
        bb.Min = ImVec2(inner_rect.Min.x, ImMax(outer_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size - scrollbar_size));
        bb.Max = ImVec2(inner_rect.Max.x, outer_rect.Max.y);
        rounding_corners |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft;
    }
    else
    {
        bb.Min = ImVec2(ImMax(outer_rect.Min.x, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Min.y);
        bb.Max = ImVec2(outer_rect.Max.x, window->InnerRect.Max.y);
        rounding_corners |= ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight : 0;
    }
    ScrollbarEx(bb, id, axis, &window->Scroll[axis], inner_rect.Max[axis] - inner_rect.Min[axis], window->ContentSize[axis] + window->WindowPadding[axis] * 2.0f, rounding_corners);
}

void ImGui::Image(const ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
        bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
    }
}

// frame_padding < 0: uses FramePadding from style (default)
// frame_padding = 0: no framing
// frame_padding > 0: set framing size
// The color used are the button colors.
bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
    // We could hash the size/uv to create a unique ID but that would prevent the user from animating UV.
    PushID((void*)(intptr_t)user_texture_id);
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
    PopID();

    const ImVec2 padding = (frame_padding >= 0) ? ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding) : style.FramePadding;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2);
    const ImRect image_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + padding, window->DC.CursorPos + padding + size);
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, style.FrameRounding));
    if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, GetColorU32(bg_col));
    window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, image_bb.Min, image_bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed)
    {
        *v = !(*v);
        MarkItemEdited(id);
    }

    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
	const ImU32 check_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark);
    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue)
    {
        // Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644)
		const ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 3.6f)));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding);
    }
    else if (*v)
    {
        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 6.0f));
        RenderCheckMark(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, square_sz - pad*2.0f);
    }

    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, const unsigned int flags_value)
{
    bool v = ((*flags & flags_value) == flags_value);
	const bool pressed = Checkbox(label, &v);
    if (pressed)
    {
        if (v)
            *flags |= flags_value;
        else
            *flags &= ~flags_value;
    }

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, const bool active)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
        return false;

    ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
    center.x = (float)(int)center.x + 0.5f;
    center.y = (float)(int)center.y + 0.5f;
    const float radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), 16);
    if (active)
    {
        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(square_sz / 6.0f));
        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), 16);
    }

    if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1,1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
    }

    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&total_bb.Min, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return pressed;
}

// FIXME: This would work nicely if it was a public template, e.g. 'template<T> RadioButton(const char* label, T* v, T v_button)', but I'm not sure how we would expose it..
bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, const int v_button)
{
    const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
    if (pressed)
        *v = v_button;
    return pressed;
}

// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, const char* overlay)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

	const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
	const ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    // Render
    fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
    const auto fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
    RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);

    // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
    char overlay_buf[32];
    if (!overlay)
    {
        ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction*100+0.01f);
        overlay = overlay_buf;
    }

	const ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
    if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f), &bb);
}

void ImGui::Bullet()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y*2), g.FontSize);
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
    ItemSize(bb);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x*2);
        return;
    }

    // Render and stay on same line
	const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize*0.5f, line_height*0.5f), text_col);
    SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Spacing()
// - Dummy()
// - NewLine()
// - AlignTextToFramePadding()
// - SeparatorEx() [Internal]
// - Separator()
// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal]
// - ShrinkWidths() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Spacing()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
}

void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(size);
    ItemAdd(bb, 0);
}

void ImGui::NewLine()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    if (window->DC.CurrLineSize.y > 0.0f)     // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
    else
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
    window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
}

void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
}

// Horizontal/vertical separating line
void ImGui::SeparatorEx(const ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)));   // Check that only 1 option is selected

	constexpr float thickness_draw = 1.0f;
	constexpr float thickness_layout = 0.0f;
    if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
    {
        // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height). Not exposed because it is misleading and it doesn't have an effect on regular layout.
		const float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
		const float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y;
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + thickness_draw, y2));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(thickness_layout, 0.0f));
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
            return;

        // Draw
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogText(" |");
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal)
    {
        // Horizontal Separator
        float x1 = window->Pos.x;
		const float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
        if (!window->DC.GroupStack.empty())
            x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;

        ImGuiColumns* columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL;
        if (columns)
            PushColumnsBackground();

        // We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit
        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y + thickness_draw));
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, thickness_layout));
        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        {
            if (columns)
            {
                PopColumnsBackground();
                columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
            }
            return;
        }

        // Draw
        window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x, bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------");

        if (columns)
        {
            PopColumnsBackground();
            columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        }
    }
}

void ImGui::Separator()
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
    ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
    flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns;
    SeparatorEx(flags);
}

// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, const float min_size1, const float min_size2, const float hover_extend,
                             const float hover_visibility_delay)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
    window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
	const bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
    window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
    if (!item_add)
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
    bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
    ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    if (held || (g.HoveredId == id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
        SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);

    ImRect bb_render = bb;
    if (held)
    {
		const ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
        float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;

        // Minimum pane size
		const float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
		const float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
        if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
        if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;

        // Apply resize
        if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
        {
            if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
            if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
            *size1 += mouse_delta;
            *size2 -= mouse_delta;
            bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
            MarkItemEdited(id);
        }
    }

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    return held;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL ShrinkWidthItemComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
	const auto a = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)lhs;
	const auto b = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)rhs;
    if (const int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width))
        return d;
    return (b->Index - a->Index);
}

// Shrink excess width from a set of item, by removing width from the larger items first.
void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, const int count, float width_excess)
{
    if (count == 1)
    {
        items[0].Width = ImMax(items[0].Width - width_excess, 1.0f);
        return;
    }
    ImQsort(items, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem), ShrinkWidthItemComparer);
    int count_same_width = 1;
    while (width_excess > 0.0f && count_same_width < count)
    {
        while (count_same_width < count && items[0].Width <= items[count_same_width].Width)
            count_same_width++;
		const float max_width_to_remove_per_item = (count_same_width < count) ? (items[0].Width - items[count_same_width].Width) : (items[0].Width - 1.0f);
		const float width_to_remove_per_item = ImMin(width_excess / count_same_width, max_width_to_remove_per_item);
        for (int item_n = 0; item_n < count_same_width; item_n++)
            items[item_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_item;
        width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_item * count_same_width;
    }

    // Round width and redistribute remainder left-to-right (could make it an option of the function?)
    // Ensure that e.g. the right-most tab of a shrunk tab-bar always reaches exactly at the same distance from the right-most edge of the tab bar separator.
    width_excess = 0.0f;
    for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
    {
		const float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width);
        width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded;
        items[n].Width = width_rounded;
    }
    if (width_excess > 0.0f)
        for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
            if (items[n].Index < (int)(width_excess + 0.01f))
                items[n].Width += 1.0f;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginCombo()
// - EndCombo()
// - Combo()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(const int items_count)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    if (items_count <= 0)
        return FLT_MAX;
    return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
}

bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
{
    // Always consume the SetNextWindowSizeConstraint() call in our early return paths
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
	const bool has_window_size_constraint = (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint) != 0;
    g.NextWindowData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint;

    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const float expected_w = CalcItemWidth();
    const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : expected_w;
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(frame_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(id);

    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    const float value_x2 = ImMax(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(frame_bb.Min, ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Left);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
    {
		const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
		const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Min.y), frame_bb.Max, bg_col, style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Right);
        if (value_x2 + arrow_size - style.FramePadding.x <= frame_bb.Max.x)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(value_x2 + style.FramePadding.y, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), text_col, ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
    }
    RenderFrameBorder(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
    if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, ImVec2(value_x2, frame_bb.Max.y), preview_value, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if ((pressed || g.NavActivateId == id) && !popup_open)
    {
        if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == 0)
            window->NavLastIds[0] = id;
        OpenPopupEx(id);
        popup_open = true;
    }

    if (!popup_open)
        return false;

    if (has_window_size_constraint)
    {
        g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint;
        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
    }
    else
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
            flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_));    // Only one
        int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
        if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular)     popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall)  popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge)  popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
    }

    char name[16];
    ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth

    // Peak into expected window size so we can position it
    if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
        if (popup_window->WasActive)
        {
			const ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowExpectedSize(popup_window);
            if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft)
                popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_Left;
			const ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
			const ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(frame_bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, frame_bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
            SetNextWindowPos(pos);
        }

    // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
	constexpr ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y));
	const bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
    PopStyleVar();
    if (!ret)
    {
        EndPopup();
        IM_ASSERT(0);   // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
        return false;
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndCombo()
{
    EndPopup();
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
static bool Items_ArrayGetter(const void * data, const int idx, const char** out_text)
{
	const auto items = (const char* const*)data;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = items[idx];
    return true;
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(const void * data, const int idx, const char** out_text)
{
    // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
	const auto items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
    int items_count = 0;
    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
    while (*p)
    {
        if (idx == items_count)
            break;
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    if (!*p)
        return false;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = p;
    return true;
}

// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, const int items_count, const int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;

    // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
    const char* preview_value = NULL;
    if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
        items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);

    // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
    if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint))
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));

    if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
        return false;

    // Display items
    // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
    bool value_changed = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
    {
        PushID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
        const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
        const char* item_text;
        if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
            item_text = "*Unknown item*";
        if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
        {
            value_changed = true;
            *current_item = i;
        }
        if (item_selected)
            SetItemDefaultFocus();
        PopID();
    }

    EndCombo();
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], const int items_count, const int height_in_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, const int height_in_items)
{
    int items_count = 0;
    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;       // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
    while (*p)
    {
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
	const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - PatchFormatStringFloatToInt()
// - DataTypeGetInfo()
// - DataTypeFormatString()
// - DataTypeApplyOp()
// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText()
// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision
// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
{
    { sizeof(char),             "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S8
    { sizeof(unsigned char),    "%u",   "%u"    },
    { sizeof(short),            "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S16
    { sizeof(unsigned short),   "%u",   "%u"    },
    { sizeof(int),              "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S32
    { sizeof(unsigned int),     "%u",   "%u"    },
#ifdef _MSC_VER
    { sizeof(ImS64),            "%I64d","%I64d" },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
    { sizeof(ImU64),            "%I64u","%I64u" },
#else
    { sizeof(ImS64),            "%lld", "%lld"  },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
    { sizeof(ImU64),            "%llu", "%llu"  },
#endif
    { sizeof(float),            "%f",   "%f"    },  // ImGuiDataType_Float (float are promoted to double in va_arg)
    { sizeof(double),           "%f",   "%lf"   },  // ImGuiDataType_Double
};
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);

// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
static const char* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(const char* fmt)
{
    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
        return "%d";
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);    // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);  // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
    if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
    {
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
        if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
            return "%d";
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImFormatString(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
        return g.TempBuffer;
#else
        IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
#endif
    }
    return fmt;
}

const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(const ImGuiDataType data_type)
{
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    return &GDataTypeInfo[data_type];
}

int ImGui::DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, const int buf_size, const ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing integer arguments
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS8*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU8*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS16*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU16*)data_ptr);
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return 0;
}

void ImGui::DataTypeApplyOp(const ImGuiDataType data_type, const int op, void* output, const void * arg1, const void* arg2)
{
    IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
    switch (data_type)
    {
        case ImGuiDataType_S8:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U8:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S16:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U16:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S32:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U32:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S64:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImS64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImS64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U64:
            if (op == '+') { *(ImU64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
            if (op == '-') { *(ImU64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Float:
            if (op == '+') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2; }
            if (op == '-') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2; }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Double:
            if (op == '+') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2; }
            if (op == '-') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2; }
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
}

// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
bool ImGui::DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
        buf++;

    // We don't support '-' op because it would conflict with inputing negative value.
    // Instead you can use +-100 to subtract from an existing value
    char op = buf[0];
    if (op == '+' || op == '*' || op == '/')
    {
        buf++;
        while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
            buf++;
    }
    else
    {
        op = 0;
    }
    if (!buf[0])
        return false;

    // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    int data_backup[2];
    const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type);
    IM_ASSERT(type_info->Size <= sizeof(data_backup));
    memcpy(data_backup, data_ptr, type_info->Size);

    if (format == NULL)
        format = type_info->ScanFmt;

    // FIXME-LEGACY: The aim is to remove those operators and write a proper expression evaluator at some point..
    int arg1i = 0;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32)
    {
		const auto v = (int*)data_ptr;
        int arg0i = *v;
        float arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0i) < 1)
            return false;
        // Store operand in a float so we can use fractional value for multipliers (*1.1), but constant always parsed as integer so we can fit big integers (e.g. 2000000003) past float precision
        if (op == '+')      { if (sscanf(buf, "%d", &arg1i)) *v = (int)(arg0i + arg1i); }                   // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f)) *v = (int)(arg0i * arg1f); }                   // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f) && arg1f != 0.0f) *v = (int)(arg0i / arg1f); }  // Divide
        else                { if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1i) == 1) *v = arg1i; }                           // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
    {
        // For floats we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in
        format = "%f";
		const auto v = (float*)data_ptr;
        float arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
    {
        format = "%lf"; // scanf differentiate float/double unlike printf which forces everything to double because of ellipsis
		const auto v = (double*)data_ptr;
        double arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
    {
        // All other types assign constant
        // We don't bother handling support for legacy operators since they are a little too crappy. Instead we will later implement a proper expression evaluator in the future.
        sscanf(buf, format, data_ptr);
    }
    else
    {
        // Small types need a 32-bit buffer to receive the result from scanf()
        int v32;
        sscanf(buf, format, &v32);
        if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
            *(ImS8*)data_ptr = (ImS8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S8_MIN, (int)IM_S8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
            *(ImU8*)data_ptr = (ImU8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U8_MIN, (int)IM_U8_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
            *(ImS16*)data_ptr = (ImS16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S16_MIN, (int)IM_S16_MAX);
        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
            *(ImU16*)data_ptr = (ImU16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U16_MIN, (int)IM_U16_MAX);
        else
            IM_ASSERT(0);
    }

    return memcmp(data_backup, data_ptr, type_info->Size) != 0;
}

static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(const int decimal_precision)
{
    static constexpr float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
    if (decimal_precision < 0)
        return FLT_MIN;
    return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
}

template<typename TYPE>
static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output)
{
    int negative = 0;
    if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
    if (*src == '+') { src++; }
    TYPE v = 0;
    while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
        v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
    *output = negative ? -v : v;
    return src;
}

template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE>
TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, const ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
{
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
        return v;
    char v_str[64];
    ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
    const char* p = v_str;
    while (*p == ' ')
        p++;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
    else
        ImAtoi(p, (SIGNEDTYPE*)&v);
    return v;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - DragBehavior() [Internal]
// - DragScalar()
// - DragScalarN()
// - DragFloat()
// - DragFloat2()
// - DragFloat3()
// - DragFloat4()
// - DragFloatRange2()
// - DragInt()
// - DragInt2()
// - DragInt3()
// - DragInt4()
// - DragIntRange2()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(const ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, const ImGuiDragFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiDragFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const bool is_clamped = (v_min < v_max);
    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f && is_decimal && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX));
    const bool is_locked = (v_min > v_max);
    if (is_locked)
        return false;

    // Default tweak speed
    if (v_speed == 0.0f && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX))
        v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);

    // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
    float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[0] > 1.0f*1.0f)
    {
        adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis];
        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
            adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyShift)
            adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
    }
    else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
    {
		const int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
        adjust_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 1.0f / 10.0f, 10.0f)[axis];
        v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
    }
    adjust_delta *= v_speed;

    // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter.
    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
        adjust_delta = -adjust_delta;

    // Clear current value on activation
    // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right
	// side, keep the 300.
	const bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
	const bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = is_clamped && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
	const bool is_drag_direction_change_with_power = is_power && ((adjust_delta < 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum > 0) || (adjust_delta > 0 && g.DragCurrentAccum < 0));
    if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward || is_drag_direction_change_with_power)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    }
    else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
    }

    if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
        return false;

    TYPE v_cur = *v;
    FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;

    if (is_power)
    {
        // Offset + round to user desired precision, with a curve on the v_min..v_max range to get more precision on one side of the range
        FLOATTYPE v_old_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        FLOATTYPE v_new_norm_curved = v_old_norm_curved + (g.DragCurrentAccum / (v_max - v_min));
        v_cur = v_min + (SIGNEDTYPE)ImPow(ImSaturate((float)v_new_norm_curved), power) * (v_max - v_min);
        v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_norm_curved;
    }
    else
    {
        v_cur += (SIGNEDTYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
    }

    // Round to user desired precision based on format string
    v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);

    // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
    g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    if (is_power)
    {
        FLOATTYPE v_cur_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_cur_norm_curved - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
    }
    else
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
    }

    // Lose zero sign for float/double
    if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
        v_cur = (TYPE)0;

    // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types)
    if (*v != v_cur && is_clamped)
    {
        if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_decimal))
            v_cur = v_min;
        if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_decimal))
            v_cur = v_max;
    }

    // Apply result
    if (*v == v_cur)
        return false;
    *v = v_cur;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::DragBehavior(const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power,
                         const ImGuiDragFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            ClearActiveID();
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            ClearActiveID();
    }
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        return false;

    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:     { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)v;
		const bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS8*) v_min : IM_S8_MIN,  v_max ? *(const ImS8*)v_max  : IM_S8_MAX,  format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImS8*)v = (ImS8)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:     { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)v;
		const bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU8*) v_min : IM_U8_MIN,  v_max ? *(const ImU8*)v_max  : IM_U8_MAX,  format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImU8*)v = (ImU8)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16:    { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)v;
		const bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS16*)v_min : IM_S16_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS16*)v_max : IM_S16_MAX, format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImS16*)v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16:    { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)v;
		const bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU16*)v_min : IM_U16_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU16*)v_max : IM_U16_MAX, format, power, flags); if (r) *(ImU16*)v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS32* )v_min : IM_S32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS32* )v_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU32* )v_min : IM_U32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU32* )v_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS64* )v_min : IM_S64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS64* )v_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU64* )v_min : IM_U64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU64* )v_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const float* )v_min : -FLT_MAX,   v_max ? *(const float* )v_max : FLT_MAX,    format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const double*)v_min : -DBL_MAX,   v_max ? *(const double*)v_max : DBL_MAX,    format, power, flags);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (power != 1.0f)
        IM_ASSERT(v_min != NULL && v_max != NULL); // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an input box
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
	const bool temp_input_is_active = TempInputTextIsActive(id);
    bool temp_input_start = false;
    if (!temp_input_is_active)
    {
        const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
        const bool clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
        const bool double_clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0]);
        if (focus_requested || clicked || double_clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
            if (focus_requested || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || double_clicked || g.NavInputId == id)
            {
                temp_input_start = true;
                FocusableItemUnregister(window);
            }
        }
    }
    if (temp_input_is_active || temp_input_start)
        return TempInputTextScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);

    // Drag behavior
    const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiDragFlags_None);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const int components, const float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format,
                        const float power)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
	const size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, const float v_speed, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const float v_speed, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const float v_speed, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const float v_speed, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, const float v_speed, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max,
                            const float power)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    bool value_changed = DragFloat("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragFloat("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();
    return value_changed;
}

// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, const float v_speed, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], const float v_speed, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], const float v_speed, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], const float v_speed, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, const float v_speed, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());

    bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
// - SliderBehavior() [Internal]
// - SliderScalar()
// - SliderScalarN()
// - SliderFloat()
// - SliderFloat2()
// - SliderFloat3()
// - SliderFloat4()
// - SliderAngle()
// - SliderInt()
// - SliderInt2()
// - SliderInt3()
// - SliderInt4()
// - VSliderScalar()
// - VSliderFloat()
// - VSliderInt()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

template<typename TYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
float ImGui::SliderCalcRatioFromValueT(const ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, const float power, const float linear_zero_pos)
{
    if (v_min == v_max)
        return 0.0f;

    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
    if (is_power)
    {
        if (v_clamped < 0.0f)
        {
            const float f = 1.0f - (float)((v_clamped - v_min) / (ImMin((TYPE)0, v_max) - v_min));
            return (1.0f - ImPow(f, 1.0f/power)) * linear_zero_pos;
        }
        else
        {
            const float f = (float)((v_clamped - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)) / (v_max - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)));
            return linear_zero_pos + ImPow(f, 1.0f/power) * (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
        }
    }

    // Linear slider
    return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
}

// FIXME: Move some of the code into SliderBehavior(). Current responsability is larger than what the equivalent DragBehaviorT<> does, we also do some rendering, etc.
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power,
                            const ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
    const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && is_decimal;

	constexpr float grab_padding = 2.0f;
    const float slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f;
    float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
    SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
    if (!is_decimal && v_range >= 0)                                             // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
        grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize);  // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
    grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
    const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
    const float slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz * 0.5f;
    const float slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz * 0.5f;

    // For power curve sliders that cross over sign boundary we want the curve to be symmetric around 0.0f
    float linear_zero_pos;   // 0.0->1.0f
    if (is_power && v_min * v_max < 0.0f)
    {
        // Different sign
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_min_to_0 = ImPow(v_min >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_min : -(FLOATTYPE)v_min, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_max_to_0 = ImPow(v_max >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_max : -(FLOATTYPE)v_max, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        linear_zero_pos = (float)(linear_dist_min_to_0 / (linear_dist_min_to_0 + linear_dist_max_to_0));
    }
    else
    {
        // Same sign
        linear_zero_pos = v_min < 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
    }

    // Process interacting with the slider
    bool value_changed = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        bool set_new_value = false;
        float clicked_t = 0.0f;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
        {
            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else
            {
                const float mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
                clicked_t = (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) ? ImClamp((mouse_abs_pos - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz, 0.0f, 1.0f) : 0.0f;
                if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
                    clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
                set_new_value = true;
            }
        }
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        {
            const ImVec2 delta2 = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 0.0f, 0.0f);
            float delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? delta2.x : -delta2.y;
            if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else if (delta != 0.0f)
            {
                clicked_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
                const int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
                if ((decimal_precision > 0) || is_power)
                {
                    delta /= 100.0f;    // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
                    if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta /= 10.0f;
                }
                else
                {
                    if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta = ((delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
                    else
                        delta /= 100.0f;
                }
                if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
                    delta *= 10.0f;
                set_new_value = true;
                if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
                    set_new_value = false;
                else
                    clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
            }
        }

        if (set_new_value)
        {
            TYPE v_new;
            if (is_power)
            {
                // Account for power curve scale on both sides of the zero
                if (clicked_t < linear_zero_pos)
                {
                    // Negative: rescale to the negative range before powering
                    float a = 1.0f - (clicked_t / linear_zero_pos);
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMin(v_max, (TYPE)0), v_min, a);
                }
                else
                {
                    // Positive: rescale to the positive range before powering
                    float a;
                    if (ImFabs(linear_zero_pos - 1.0f) > 1.e-6f)
                        a = (clicked_t - linear_zero_pos) / (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
                    else
                        a = clicked_t;
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMax(v_min, (TYPE)0), v_max, a);
                }
            }
            else
            {
                // Linear slider
                if (is_decimal)
                {
                    v_new = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, clicked_t);
                }
                else
                {
                    // For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
                    // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
                    FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (v_max - v_min) * clicked_t;
                    TYPE v_new_off_floor = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f);
                    TYPE v_new_off_round = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)0.5);
                    if (!is_decimal && v_new_off_floor < v_new_off_round)
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_round;
                    else
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_floor;
                }
            }

            // Round to user desired precision based on format string
            v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE,SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);

            // Apply result
            if (*v != v_new)
            {
                *v = v_new;
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
    }

    if (slider_sz < 1.0f)
    {
        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min, bb.Min);
    }
    else
    {
        // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
        float grab_t = SliderCalcRatioFromValueT<TYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
            grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
        const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
        else
            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f);
    }

    return value_changed;
}

// For 32-bits and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power,
                           const ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S8:  { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)v;
		const bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS8*)v_min,  *(const ImS8*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS8*)v  = (ImS8)v32;  return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U8:  { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)v;
		const bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU8*)v_min,  *(const ImU8*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU8*)v  = (ImU8)v32;  return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S16: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)v;
		const bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS16*)v_min, *(const ImS16*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS16*)v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_U16: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)v;
		const bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU16*)v_min, *(const ImU16*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU16*)v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)v_min >= IM_S32_MIN/2 && *(const ImS32*)v_max <= IM_S32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)v,  *(const ImS32*)v_min,  *(const ImS32*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)v_max <= IM_U32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)v,  *(const ImU32*)v_min,  *(const ImU32*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)v_min >= IM_S64_MIN/2 && *(const ImS64*)v_max <= IM_S64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)v,  *(const ImS64*)v_min,  *(const ImS64*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)v_max <= IM_U64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)v,  *(const ImU64*)v_min,  *(const ImU64*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)v_min >= -FLT_MAX/2.0f && *(const float*)v_max <= FLT_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)v,  *(const float*)v_min,  *(const float*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)v_min >= -DBL_MAX/2.0f && *(const double*)v_max <= DBL_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<double,double,double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)v, *(const double*)v_min, *(const double*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
	const bool temp_input_is_active = TempInputTextIsActive(id);
    bool temp_input_start = false;
    if (!temp_input_is_active)
    {
        const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
        const bool clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
        if (focus_requested || clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            SetActiveID(id, window);
            SetFocusID(id, window);
            FocusWindow(window);
            g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
            if (focus_requested || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || g.NavInputId == id)
            {
                temp_input_start = true;
                FocusableItemUnregister(window);
            }
        }
    }
    if (temp_input_is_active || temp_input_start)
        return TempInputTextScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_None, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.x > grab_bb.Min.x)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return value_changed;
}

// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
	const size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, const float v_degrees_min, const float v_degrees_max, const char* format)
{
    if (format == NULL)
        format = "%.0f deg";
    float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2*IM_PI);
	const bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, 1.0f);
    *v_rad = v_deg * (2*IM_PI) / 360.0f;
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
    {
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
    }

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    if (grab_bb.Max.y > grab_bb.Min.y)
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, const float v_min, const float v_max, const char* format, const float power)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, const int v_min, const int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal]
// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal]
// - TempInputTextScalar() [Internal]
// - InputScalar()
// - InputScalarN()
// - InputFloat()
// - InputFloat2()
// - InputFloat3()
// - InputFloat4()
// - InputInt()
// - InputInt2()
// - InputInt3()
// - InputInt4()
// - InputDouble()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt)
{
    while (const char c = fmt[0])
    {
        if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
            return fmt;
        else if (c == '%')
            fmt++;
        fmt++;
    }
    return fmt;
}

const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt)
{
    // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
	constexpr unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
	constexpr unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
    for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
    {
        if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
        if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
    }
    return fmt;
}

// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
//  fmt = "blah blah"  -> return fmt
//  fmt = "%.3f"       -> return fmt
//  fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
//  fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, const size_t buf_size)
{
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
    if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
        return fmt_start;
    ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size));
    return buf;
}

// Parse display precision back from the display format string
// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, const int default_precision)
{
    fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return default_precision;
    fmt++;
    while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
        fmt++;
    int precision = INT_MAX;
    if (*fmt == '.')
    {
        fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
        if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
            precision = default_precision;
    }
    if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
        precision = -1;
    if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
        precision = -1;
    return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
}

// Create text input in place of another active widget (e.g. used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets)
// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations.
bool ImGui::TempInputTextScalar(const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiID id, const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // On the first frame, g.TempInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id.
    // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back.
    const bool init = (g.TempInputTextId != id);
    if (init)
        ClearActiveID();

    char fmt_buf[32];
    char data_buf[32];
    format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
    DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
    ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);

    g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;
    flags |= ((data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
    bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, NULL, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), bb.GetSize(), flags);
    if (init)
    {
        // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id.
        IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);
        g.TempInputTextId = g.ActiveId;
    }
    if (value_changed)
    {
        value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(data_buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, data_ptr, NULL);
        if (value_changed)
            MarkItemEdited(id);
    }
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    if (format == NULL)
        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;

    char buf[64];
    DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);

    bool value_changed = false;
    if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll;
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;  // We call MarkItemEdited() ourselve by comparing the actual data rather than the string.

    if (step != NULL)
    {
        const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();

        BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
        PushID(label);
        SetNextItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
        if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);

        // Step buttons
        const ImVec2 backup_frame_padding = style.FramePadding;
        style.FramePadding.x = style.FramePadding.y;
        ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups;
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
            button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
            value_changed = true;
        }

        const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_end)
        {
            SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_end);
        }
        style.FramePadding = backup_frame_padding;

        PopID();
        EndGroup();
    }
    else
    {
        if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags))
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialTextA.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
    }
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, const ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const int components, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
	const size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        if (i > 0)
            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, v, step, step_fast, format, flags);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    if (label != label_end)
    {
        SameLine(0.0f, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextEx(label, label_end);
    }

    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

// Prefer using "const char* format" directly, which is more flexible and consistent with other API.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, const float step, const float step_fast, const int decimal_precision, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputFloat(label, v, step, step_fast, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const int decimal_precision, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const int decimal_precision, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const int decimal_precision, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
}
#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS

bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
    const char* format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
{
    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline, InputTextWithHint
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - InputText()
// - InputTextWithHint()
// - InputTextMultiline()
// - InputTextEx() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, const size_t buf_size, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, const ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0,0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, const size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, const ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, const size_t buf_size, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, const ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, hint, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end)
{
    int line_count = 0;
    const char* s = text_begin;
    while (const char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
        if (c == '\n')
            line_count++;
    s--;
    if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
        line_count++;
    *out_text_end = s;
    return line_count;
}

static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, const bool stop_on_new_line)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImFont * font = g.Font;
    const float line_height = g.FontSize;
    const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;

	auto text_size = ImVec2(0,0);
    float line_width = 0.0f;

    const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
    while (s < text_end)
    {
		const unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
        if (c == '\n')
        {
            text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
            text_size.y += line_height;
            line_width = 0.0f;
            if (stop_on_new_line)
                break;
            continue;
        }
        if (c == '\r')
            continue;

        const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale;
        line_width += char_width;
    }

    if (text_size.x < line_width)
        text_size.x = line_width;

    if (out_offset)
        *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height);  // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n

    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f)                        // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
        text_size.y += line_height;

    if (remaining)
        *remaining = s;

    return text_size;
}

// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
namespace ImStb
{

static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj)                             { return obj->CurLenW; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int idx)                      { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
static float   STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int line_start_idx, const int char_idx)  {
	const ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE;
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui; return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize); }
static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(const int key)                                                    { return key >= 0x10000 ? 0 : key; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
static void    STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int line_start_idx)
{
    const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
    const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
    r->x0 = 0.0f;
    r->x1 = size.x;
    r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
    r->ymin = 0.0f;
    r->ymax = size.y;
    r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
}

static bool is_separator(const unsigned int c)                                        { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|'; }
static int  is_word_boundary_from_right(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int idx)      { return idx > 0 ? (is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && !is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)   { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
#ifdef __APPLE__    // FIXME: Move setting to IO structure
static int  is_word_boundary_from_left(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)       { return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#else
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++;
	const int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#endif
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT   STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL    // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL

static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int pos, const int n)
{
    ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;

    // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
    obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
    obj->CurLenW -= n;

    // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove)
    const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
    while (const ImWchar c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';
}

static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, const int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, const int new_text_len)
{
    const bool is_resizable = (obj->UserFlags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
    IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);

    const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
    if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
        return false;

    // Grow internal buffer if needed
    if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return false;
        IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
        obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
    }

    ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    if (pos != text_len)
        memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
    memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));

    obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
    obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
    obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';

    return true;
}

// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT         0x200000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT        0x200001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP           0x200002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN         0x200003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART    0x200004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND      0x200005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART    0x200006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND      0x200007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE       0x200008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE    0x200009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO         0x20000A // keyboard input to perform undo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO         0x20000B // keyboard input to perform redo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT     0x20000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT    0x20000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT        0x400000

#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
#include "imstb_textedit.h"

}

void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(const int key)
{
    stb_textedit_key(this, &Stb, key);
    CursorFollow = true;
    CursorAnimReset();
}

ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
{
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
}

// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(const int pos, const int bytes_count)
{
    IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
    char* dst = Buf + pos;
    const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
    while (const char c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';

    if (CursorPos + bytes_count >= pos)
        CursorPos -= bytes_count;
    else if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos = pos;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
}

void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(const int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end)
{
    const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
    if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return;

        // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the midly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer alltogether!)
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
        IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
        IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TextA.Data);
		const int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
        edit_state->TextA.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
        Buf = edit_state->TextA.Data;
        BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
    }

    if (BufTextLen != pos)
        memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
    memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
    Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';

    if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos += new_text_len;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen += new_text_len;
}

// Return false to discard a character.
static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, const ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, const ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    unsigned int c = *p_char;

    // Filter non-printable (NB: isprint is unreliable! see #2467)
    if (c < 0x20)
    {
        bool pass = false;
        pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline));
        pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
        if (!pass)
            return false;
    }

    // Filter private Unicode range. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys (FIXME)
    if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF)
        return false;

    // Generic named filters
    if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
            if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
                *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A'-'a'));

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
            if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
                return false;
    }

    // Custom callback filter
    if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
    {
        ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
        memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
        callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
        callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
        callback_data.Flags = flags;
        callback_data.UserData = user_data;
        if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
            return false;
        *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
        if (!callback_data.EventChar)
            return false;
    }

    return true;
}

// Edit a string of text
// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
//   This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match
//   Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
// (FIXME: Rather confusing and messy function, among the worse part of our codebase, expecting to rewrite a V2 at some point.. Partly because we are
//  doing UTF8 > U16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to easily interface with stb_textedit. Ideally should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)));        // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

	constexpr bool RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE = false;
    const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
    const bool is_readonly = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) != 0;
    const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
    const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
    const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    if (is_resizable)
        IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!

    if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope,
        BeginGroup();
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? g.FontSize * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x) : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
    if (is_multiline)
    {
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        {
            ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        if (!BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()))
        {
            EndChildFrame();
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        draw_window = GetCurrentWindow();
        draw_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask; // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight
        size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
    }
    else
    {
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
            return false;
    }
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if (hovered)
        g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;

    // NB: we are only allowed to access 'edit_state' if we are the active widget.
    ImGuiInputTextState* state = NULL;
    if (g.InputTextState.ID == id)
        state = &g.InputTextState;

    const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
    const bool focus_requested_by_code = focus_requested && (g.FocusRequestCurrWindow == window && g.FocusRequestCurrCounterAll == window->DC.FocusCounterAll);
    const bool focus_requested_by_tab = focus_requested && !focus_requested_by_code;

    const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
    const bool user_nav_input_start = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard));
    const bool user_scroll_finish = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == GetScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
    const bool user_scroll_active = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == GetScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);

    bool clear_active_id = false;
    bool select_all = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) != 0 || user_nav_input_start) && (!is_multiline);

    const bool init_make_active = (focus_requested || user_clicked || user_scroll_finish || user_nav_input_start);
    const bool init_state = (init_make_active || user_scroll_active);
    if (init_state && g.ActiveId != id)
    {
        // Access state even if we don't own it yet.
        state = &g.InputTextState;
        state->CursorAnimReset();

        // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
        // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
        const int buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
        state->InitialTextA.resize(buf_len + 1);    // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        memcpy(state->InitialTextA.Data, buf, buf_len + 1);

        // Start edition
        const char* buf_end = NULL;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);          // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
        state->TextA.resize(0);
        state->TextAIsValid = false;                // TextA is not valid yet (we will display buf until then)
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);      // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.

        // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
        // FIXME: For non-readonly widgets we might be able to require that TextAIsValid && TextA == buf ? (untested) and discard undo stack if user buffer has changed.
        const bool recycle_state = (state->ID == id);
        if (recycle_state)
        {
            // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
            // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
            state->CursorClamp();
        }
        else
        {
            state->ID = id;
            state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            stb_textedit_initialize_state(&state->Stb, !is_multiline);
            if (!is_multiline && focus_requested_by_code)
                select_all = true;
        }
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode)
            state->Stb.insert_mode = 1;
        if (!is_multiline && (focus_requested_by_tab || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)))
            select_all = true;
    }

    if (g.ActiveId != id && init_make_active)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state && state->ID == id);
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        IM_ASSERT(ImGuiNavInput_COUNT < 32);
        g.ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags = (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);
        if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))  // Disable keyboard tabbing out as we will use the \t character.
            g.ActiveIdBlockNavInputFlags |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_KeyTab_);
        if (!is_multiline && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
            g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = ((1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
    }

    // We have an edge case if ActiveId was set through another widget (e.g. widget being swapped), clear id immediately (don't wait until the end of the function)
    if (g.ActiveId == id && state == NULL)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Release focus when we click outside
    if (g.ActiveId == id && io.MouseClicked[0] && !init_state && !init_make_active) //-V560
        clear_active_id = true;

    // Lock the decision of whether we are going to take the path displaying the cursor or selection
    const bool render_cursor = (g.ActiveId == id) || (state && user_scroll_active);
    bool render_selection = state && state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    bool value_changed = false;
    bool enter_pressed = false;

    // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
    // FIXME-OPT: Because our selection/cursor code currently needs the wide text we need to convert it when active, which is not ideal :(
    if (is_readonly && state != NULL && (render_cursor || render_selection))
    {
        const char* buf_end = NULL;
        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);
        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
        state->CursorClamp();
        render_selection &= state->HasSelection();
    }

    // Select the buffer to render.
    const bool buf_display_from_state = (render_cursor || render_selection || g.ActiveId == id) && !is_readonly && state && state->TextAIsValid;
    const bool is_displaying_hint = (hint != NULL && (buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf)[0] == 0);

    // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
    {
        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
        ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
        password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
        password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
        password_font->DisplayOffset = g.Font->DisplayOffset;
        password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
        password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
        password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
        password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
        password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
        IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
        PushFont(password_font);
    }

    // Process mouse inputs and character inputs
    int backup_current_text_length = 0;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        backup_current_text_length = state->CurLenA;
        state->BufCapacityA = buf_size;
        state->UserFlags = flags;
        state->UserCallback = callback;
        state->UserCallbackData = callback_user_data;

        // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
        // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
        g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;

        // Edit in progress
        const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + state->ScrollX;
        const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y - style.FramePadding.y) : (g.FontSize*0.5f));

        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        if (select_all || (hovered && !is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
        {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
        }
        else if (hovered && is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
        {
            // Double-click select a word only, OS X style (by simulating keystrokes)
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
        }
        else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock)
        {
            if (hovered)
            {
                stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
                state->CursorAnimReset();
            }
        }
        else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
        {
            stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
            state->CursorAnimReset();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        }
        if (state->SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = false;

        // It is ill-defined whether the back-end needs to send a \t character when pressing the TAB keys.
        // Win32 and GLFW naturally do it but not SDL.
        const bool ignore_char_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
        if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !ignore_char_inputs && !io.KeyShift && !is_readonly)
            if (!io.InputQueueCharacters.contains('\t'))
            {
                unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }

        // Process regular text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
        // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
        if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0)
        {
            if (!ignore_char_inputs && !is_readonly && !user_nav_input_start)
                for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++)
                {
                    // Insert character if they pass filtering
                    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n];
                    if (c == '\t' && io.KeyShift)
                        continue;
                    if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
                }

            // Consume characters
            io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
        }
    }

    // Process other shortcuts/key-presses
    bool cancel_edit = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        const bool is_shortcut_key = (is_osx ? (io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl) : (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeySuper)) && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyShift; // OS X style: Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
        const bool is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && io.KeySuper && io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;
        const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl;                     // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
        const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;  // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
        const bool is_ctrl_key_only = io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
        const bool is_shift_key_only = io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;

        const bool is_cut   = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && !is_readonly && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        const bool is_copy  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only  && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
        const bool is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_readonly;
        const bool is_undo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z)) && !is_readonly && is_undoable);
        const bool is_redo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z))) && !is_readonly && is_undoable;

        if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow))                        { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_RightArrow))                  { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline)     { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline)   { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Home))                        { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_End))                         { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete) && !is_readonly)      { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && !is_readonly)
        {
            if (!state->HasSelection())
            {
                if (is_wordmove_key_down)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl)
                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
            }
            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter))
        {
            bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
            if (!is_multiline || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
            {
                enter_pressed = clear_active_id = true;
            }
            else if (!is_readonly)
            {
                unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Escape))
        {
            clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
        }
        else if (is_undo || is_redo)
        {
            state->OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
            state->ClearSelection();
        }
        else if (is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_A))
        {
            state->SelectAll();
            state->CursorFollow = true;
        }
        else if (is_cut || is_copy)
        {
            // Cut, Copy
            if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
            {
                const int ib = state->HasSelection() ? ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : 0;
                const int ie = state->HasSelection() ? ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : state->CurLenW;
                const int clipboard_data_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie) + 1;
				auto clipboard_data = (char*)IM_ALLOC(clipboard_data_len * sizeof(char));
                ImTextStrToUtf8(clipboard_data, clipboard_data_len, state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie);
                SetClipboardText(clipboard_data);
                MemFree(clipboard_data);
            }
            if (is_cut)
            {
                if (!state->HasSelection())
                    state->SelectAll();
                state->CursorFollow = true;
                stb_textedit_cut(state, &state->Stb);
            }
        }
        else if (is_paste)
        {
            if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
            {
                // Filter pasted buffer
                const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
				auto clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)IM_ALLOC((clipboard_len+1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
                int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
                for (const char* s = clipboard; *s; )
                {
                    unsigned int c;
                    s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
                    if (c == 0)
                        break;
                    if (c >= 0x10000 || !InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        continue;
                    clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
                }
                clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
                if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
                {
                    stb_textedit_paste(state, &state->Stb, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
                    state->CursorFollow = true;
                }
                MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
            }
        }

        // Update render selection flag after events have been handled, so selection highlight can be displayed during the same frame.
        render_selection |= state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
    }

    // Process callbacks and apply result back to user's buffer.
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        const char* apply_new_text = NULL;
        int apply_new_text_length = 0;
        if (cancel_edit)
        {
            // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(buf, state->InitialTextA.Data) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = state->InitialTextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->InitialTextA.Size - 1;
            }
        }

        // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
        // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. Also this allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage.
        bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (enter_pressed && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
        if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
        {
            // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
            // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
            // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
            // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
            if (!is_readonly)
            {
                state->TextAIsValid = true;
                state->TextA.resize(state->TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
                ImTextStrToUtf8(state->TextA.Data, state->TextA.Size, state->TextW.Data, NULL);
            }

            // User callback
            if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
            {
                IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);

                // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
                ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
                ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_COUNT;
                if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
                }
                else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;

                if (event_flag)
                {
                    ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                    memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
                    callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
                    callback_data.Flags = flags;
                    callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;

                    callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
                    callback_data.Buf = state->TextA.Data;
                    callback_data.BufTextLen = state->CurLenA;
                    callback_data.BufSize = state->BufCapacityA;
                    callback_data.BufDirty = false;

                    // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
                    ImWchar* text = state->TextW.Data;
                    const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.cursor);
                    const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_start);
                    const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_end);

                    // Call user code
                    callback(&callback_data);

                    // Read back what user may have modified
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == state->TextA.Data);  // Invalid to modify those fields
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == state->BufCapacityA);
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
                    if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos)            { state->Stb.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); state->CursorFollow = true; }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start)  { state->Stb.select_start = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end)      { state->Stb.select_end = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); }
                    if (callback_data.BufDirty)
                    {
                        IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
                        if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
                            state->TextW.resize(state->TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length));
                        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
                        state->CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen;  // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
                        state->CursorAnimReset();
                    }
                }
            }

            // Will copy result string if modified
            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(state->TextA.Data, buf) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = state->TextA.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = state->CurLenA;
            }
        }

        // Copy result to user buffer
        if (apply_new_text)
        {
            IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
            if (backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length && is_resizable)
            {
                ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
                callback_data.Flags = flags;
                callback_data.Buf = buf;
                callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
                callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
                callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
                callback(&callback_data);
                buf = callback_data.Buf;
                buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
                apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
                IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
            }

            // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
            ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
            value_changed = true;
        }

        // Clear temporary user storage
        state->UserFlags = 0;
        state->UserCallback = NULL;
        state->UserCallbackData = NULL;
    }

    // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
    if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Render frame
    if (!is_multiline)
    {
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    }

    const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
    ImVec2 draw_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
    ImVec2 text_size(0.0f, 0.0f);

    // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
    // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
    // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
	constexpr int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;
    const char* buf_display = buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf; //-V595
    const char* buf_display_end = NULL; // We have specialized paths below for setting the length
    if (is_displaying_hint)
    {
        buf_display = hint;
        buf_display_end = hint + strlen(hint);
    }

    // Render text. We currently only render selection when the widget is active or while scrolling.
    // FIXME: We could remove the '&& render_cursor' to keep rendering selection when inactive.
    if (render_cursor || render_selection)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
        if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;

        // Render text (with cursor and selection)
        // This is going to be messy. We need to:
        // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
        // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
        // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
        // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
        // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
        const ImWchar* text_begin = state->TextW.Data;
        ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;

        {
            // Find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' (slot 0) and 'select_start' (slot 1) positions.
            const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2] = { NULL, NULL };
            int searches_result_line_no[2] = { -1000, -1000 };
            int searches_remaining = 0;
            if (render_cursor)
            {
                searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + state->Stb.cursor;
                searches_result_line_no[0] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }
            if (render_selection)
            {
                searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
                searches_result_line_no[1] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }

            // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
            // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
            searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
            int line_count = 0;
            //for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++)  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bits
            for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
                if (*s == '\n')
                {
                    line_count++;
                    if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                    if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                }
            line_count++;
            if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1)
                searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count;

            // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
            cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
            cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[0] * g.FontSize;
            if (searches_result_line_no[1] >= 0)
            {
                select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
                select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[1] * g.FontSize;
            }

            // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
            if (is_multiline)
                text_size = ImVec2(size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
        }

        // Scroll
        if (render_cursor && state->CursorFollow)
        {
            // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
            if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
            {
                const float scroll_increment_x = size.x * 0.25f;
                if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = (float)(int)ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x);
                else if (cursor_offset.x - size.x >= state->ScrollX)
                    state->ScrollX = (float)(int)(cursor_offset.x - size.x + scroll_increment_x);
            }
            else
            {
                state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
            }

            // Vertical scroll
            if (is_multiline)
            {
                float scroll_y = draw_window->Scroll.y;
                if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
                else if (cursor_offset.y - size.y >= scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - size.y;
                draw_pos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y);   // Manipulate cursor pos immediately avoid a frame of lag
                draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
            }

            state->CursorFollow = false;
        }

        // Draw selection
        const auto draw_scroll = ImVec2(state->ScrollX, 0.0f);
        if (render_selection)
        {
            const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
            const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);

            ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg, render_cursor ? 1.0f : 0.6f); // FIXME: current code flow mandate that render_cursor is always true here, we are leaving the transparent one for tests.
            float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f;    // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
            float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
            ImVec2 rect_pos = draw_pos + select_start_offset - draw_scroll;
            for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
            {
                if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
                    break;
                if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
                {
                    //p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p);  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bits
                    //p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end;
                    while (p < text_selected_end)
                        if (*p++ == '\n')
                            break;
                }
                else
                {
                    ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
                    if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = (float)(int)(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
                    ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos +ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
                    rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
                    if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                        draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
                }
                rect_pos.x = draw_pos.x - draw_scroll.x;
                rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
            }
        }

        // We test for 'buf_display_max_length' as a way to avoid some pathological cases (e.g. single-line 1 MB string) which would make ImDrawList crash.
        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
        {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos - draw_scroll, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }

        // Draw blinking cursor
        if (render_cursor)
        {
            state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
            bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
            ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll;
            ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f);
            if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));

            // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
            if (!is_readonly)
                g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Render text only (no selection, no cursor)
        if (is_multiline)
            text_size = ImVec2(size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_display_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
        else if (!is_displaying_hint && g.ActiveId == id)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;
        else if (!is_displaying_hint)
            buf_display_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);

        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
        {
            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
        }
    }

    if (is_multiline)
    {
        Dummy(text_size + ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); // Always add room to scroll an extra line
        EndChildFrame();
        EndGroup();
    }

    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
        PopFont();

    // Log as text
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(is_password && !is_displaying_hint))
        LogRenderedText(&draw_pos, buf_display, buf_display_end);

    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if (value_changed && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited))
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
        return enter_pressed;
    else
        return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ColorEdit3()
// - ColorEdit4()
// - ColorPicker3()
// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal]
// - ColorPicker4()
// - ColorButton()
// - SetColorEditOptions()
// - ColorTooltip() [Internal]
// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal]
// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
}

// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// With typical options: Left-click on colored square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const float w_full = CalcItemWidth();
    const float w_button = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    const float w_inputs = w_full - w_button;
    const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);

    // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
    const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
        flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;

    // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask);
    flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));   // Check that only 1 is selected

    const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
    const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
    const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;

    // Convert to the formats we need
    float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV))
    {
        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
        if (f[1] == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0)
            f[0] = g.ColorEditLastHue;
    }
    int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };

    bool value_changed = false;
    bool value_changed_as_float = false;

    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    const float inputs_offset_x = (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) ? w_button : 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + inputs_offset_x;

    if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
        const float w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
        const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));

        const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
        static const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
        static const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d" }, // Short display
            { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        static const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f" }, // Short display
            { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) ? 2 : 1;

        for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
        {
            if (n > 0)
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            SetNextItemWidth((n + 1 < components) ? w_item_one : w_item_last);

            // Disable Hue edit when Saturation is zero
            const bool disable_hue_edit = (n == 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && i[1] == 0);
            if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
            {
                value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f/255.0f, disable_hue_edit ? +FLT_MAX : 0.0f, disable_hue_edit ? -FLT_MAX : hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
                value_changed_as_float |= value_changed;
            }
            else
            {
                value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, disable_hue_edit ? INT_MAX : 0, disable_hue_edit ? INT_MIN : hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
            }
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
                OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
        }
    }
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB Hexadecimal Input
        char buf[64];
        if (alpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255), ImClamp(i[3],0,255));
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255));
        SetNextItemWidth(w_inputs);
        if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
        {
            value_changed = true;
			const char * p = buf;
            while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
                p++;
            i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = i[3] = 0;
            if (alpha)
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
            else
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
    }

	const ImGuiWindow * picker_active_window = NULL;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
    {
        const float button_offset_x = ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) || (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)) ? 0.0f : w_inputs + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + button_offset_x, pos.y);

        const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
        if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
        {
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
            {
                // Store current color and open a picker
                g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
                OpenPopup("picker");
                SetNextWindowPos(window->DC.LastItemRect.GetBL() + ImVec2(-1,style.ItemSpacing.y));
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        if (BeginPopup("picker"))
        {
            picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
            if (label != label_display_end)
            {
                TextEx(label, label_display_end);
                Spacing();
            }
			constexpr ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
			const ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
            SetNextItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
            value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
            EndPopup();
        }
    }

    if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + w_full + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, pos.y + style.FramePadding.y);
        TextEx(label, label_display_end);
    }

    // Convert back
    if (value_changed && picker_active_window == NULL)
    {
        if (!value_changed_as_float)
            for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
                f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
        {
            g.ColorEditLastHue = f[0];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
            memcpy(g.ColorEditLastColor, f, sizeof(float) * 3);
        }
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);

        col[0] = f[0];
        col[1] = f[1];
        col[2] = f[2];
        if (alpha)
            col[3] = f[3];
    }

    PopID();
    EndGroup();

    // Drag and Drop Target
    // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
    if ((window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
    {
        bool accepted_drag_drop = false;
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
        }

        // Drag-drop payloads are always RGB
        if (accepted_drag_drop && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        EndDragDropTarget();
    }

    // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
    if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
        window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
    if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
        return false;
    col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
    return true;
}

static inline ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColor(const ImU32 col_a, const ImU32 col_b)
{
	const float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
	const int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
	const int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
	const int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
}

// Helper for ColorPicker4()
// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
// I spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding alltogether.
void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(const ImVec2 p_min, const ImVec2 p_max, const ImU32 col, const float grid_step, const ImVec2 grid_off, const float rounding,
                                                 const int rounding_corners_flags)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
    {
		const ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(204,204,204,255), col));
		const ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), col));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);

        int yi = 0;
        for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
        {
            float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
            if (y2 <= y1)
                continue;
            for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
            {
                float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
                if (x2 <= x1)
                    continue;
                int rounding_corners_flags_cell = 0;
                if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight; }
                if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight; }
                rounding_corners_flags_cell &= rounding_corners_flags;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1,y1), ImVec2(x2,y2), col_bg2, rounding_corners_flags_cell ? rounding : 0.0f, rounding_corners_flags_cell);
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
    }
}

// Helper for ColorPicker4()
static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2 pos, const ImVec2 half_sz, const float bar_w, const float alpha)
{
	const ImU32 alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1,         pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x,             pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x,     pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
}

// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// (In C++ the 'float col[4]' notation for a function argument is equivalent to 'float* col', we only specify a size to facilitate understanding of the code.)
// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
// FIXME: this is trying to be aware of style.Alpha but not fully correct. Also, the color wheel will have overlapping glitches with (style.Alpha < 1.0)
bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;

    const float width = CalcItemWidth();
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;

    // Context menu: display and store options.
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask)); // Check that only 1 is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));  // Check that only 1 is selected
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);

    // Setup
    int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
    bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
    ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
    float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
    float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bars_triangles_half_sz = (float)(int)(bars_width * 0.20f);

    float backup_initial_col[4];
    memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));

    float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
    float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
    float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
    ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size*0.5f);

    // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
    float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
	auto triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
	auto triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
	auto triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.

    float H = col[0], S = col[1], V = col[2];
    float R = col[0], G = col[1], B = col[2];
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
    {
        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
        if (S == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0)
            H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
    {
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
    }

    bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;

    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
        InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
            ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
            float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
            if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner-1)*(wheel_r_inner-1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer+1)*(wheel_r_outer+1))
            {
                // Interactive with Hue wheel
                H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI*0.5f;
                if (H < 0.0f)
                    H += 1.0f;
                value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
            }
            float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
            {
                // Interacting with SV triangle
                ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
                if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
                    current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
                float uu, vv, ww;
                ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
                V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // SV rectangle logic
        InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        // Hue bar logic
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
        }
    }

    // Alpha bar logic
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = true;
        }
    }
    PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        BeginGroup();
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_display_end)
        {
            if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextEx(label, label_display_end);
        }
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
            Text("Current");

        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip;
        ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
        if (ref_col != NULL)
        {
            Text("Original");
            ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
            if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
            {
                memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
        PopItemFlag();
        EndGroup();
    }

    // Convert back color to RGB
    if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
        {
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H >= 1.0f ? H - 10 * 1e-6f : H, S > 0.0f ? S : 10*1e-6f, V > 0.0f ? V : 1e-6f, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            g.ColorEditLastHue = H;
            memcpy(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3);
        }
        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        {
            col[0] = H;
            col[1] = S;
            col[2] = V;
        }
    }

    // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
    bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
            {
                // FIXME: Hackily differenciating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
                // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
                value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
                value_changed = true;
            }
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex);
        PopItemWidth();
    }

    // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
    if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
    {
        float new_H, new_S, new_V;
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
        if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
        {
            if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            else if (new_S <= 0)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        }
    }

    if (value_changed)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
        {
            R = col[0];
            G = col[1];
            B = col[2];
            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
            if (S == 0 && memcmp(g.ColorEditLastColor, col, sizeof(float) * 3) == 0) // Fix local Hue as display below will use it immediately.
                H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
        }
        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        {
            H = col[0];
            S = col[1];
            V = col[2];
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
        }
    }

    const int style_alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(style.Alpha);
    const ImU32 col_black = IM_COL32(0,0,0,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_white = IM_COL32(255,255,255,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_midgrey = IM_COL32(128,128,128,style_alpha8);
    const ImU32 col_hues[6 + 1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8) };

    ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, style.Alpha); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
    ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
    ImU32 user_col32_striped_of_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(R, G, B, style.Alpha)); // Important: this is still including the main rendering/style alpha!!

    ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Render Hue Wheel
        const float aeps = 0.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
        const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
        for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
        {
            const float a0 = (n)     /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
            const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
            const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
            draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
            draw_list->PathStroke(col_white, false, wheel_thickness);
            const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;

            // Paint colors over existing vertices
            ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
            ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
            ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, col_hues[n], col_hues[n+1]);
        }

        // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
        float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f);
        float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
        int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad+1, col_midgrey, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, col_white, hue_cursor_segments);

        // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
        ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
        draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, col_white);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, 0);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, col_white);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, 0);
        draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, col_midgrey, 1.5f);
        sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // Render SV Square
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), col_white, hue_color32, hue_color32, col_white);
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0, 0, col_black, col_black);
        RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S)     * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
        sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);

        // Render Hue Bar
        for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), col_hues[i], col_hues[i], col_hues[i + 1], col_hues[i + 1]);
        float bar0_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
        RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
    }

    // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
    float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad+1, col_midgrey, 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col_white, 12);

    // Render alpha bar
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
        ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0, bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
        float bar1_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
        RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
    }

    EndGroup();

    if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
        value_changed = false;
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

// A little colored square. Return true when clicked.
// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
// Note that 'col' may be encoded in HSV if ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV is set.
bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, ImVec2 size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
	const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    if (size.x == 0.0f)
        size.x = default_size;
    if (size.y == 0.0f)
        size.y = default_size;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
        flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);

    ImVec4 col_rgb = col;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z);

	const ImVec4 col_rgb_without_alpha(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, 1.0f);
	const float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
	const float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
    ImRect bb_inner = bb;
	constexpr float off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
    bb_inner.Expand(off);
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col_rgb.w < 1.0f)
    {
		const float mid_x = (float)(int)((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f + 0.5f);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_rgb), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight| ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_rgb_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft);
    }
    else
    {
        // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
		const ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col_rgb : col_rgb_without_alpha;
        if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
            RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
        else
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All);
    }
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
        RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
    else
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border

    // Drag and Drop Source
    // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
        else
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
        ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
        SameLine();
        TextEx("Color");
        EndDragDropSource();
    }

    // Tooltip
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
        ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));

    return pressed;
}

// Initialize/override default color options
void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask));    // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask));   // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask));     // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask));      // Check only 1 option is selected
    g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
}

// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;

    BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
    const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
    if (text_end > text)
    {
        TextEx(text, text_end);
        Separator();
    }

	const ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
	const ImVec4 cf(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
    int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
    ColorButton("##preview", cf, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
    SameLine();
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) || !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputMask))
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        else
            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f, A: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    }
    EndTooltip();
}

void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
	const bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask);
	const bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
    if (allow_opt_inputs)
    {
        if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB;
        if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV;
        if (RadioButton("Hex", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DisplayMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
    }
    if (allow_opt_datatype)
    {
        if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
        if (RadioButton("0..255",     (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
        if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
    }

    if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
        Separator();
    if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1,0)))
        OpenPopup("Copy");
    if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
    {
        int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
        char buf[64];
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        EndPopup();
    }

    g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
    EndPopup();
}

void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
	const bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
	const bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (allow_opt_picker)
    {
		const ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
        PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
        for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
        {
            // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
            if (picker_type > 0) Separator();
            PushID(picker_type);
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview|(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
            if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
            if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
            ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
            if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
                g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
            SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
            ImVec4 dummy_ref_col;
            memcpy(&dummy_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4));
            ColorPicker4("##dummypicker", &dummy_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
            PopID();
        }
        PopItemWidth();
    }
    if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
    {
        if (allow_opt_picker) Separator();
        CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", (unsigned int*)&g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    }
    EndPopup();
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - TreeNode()
// - TreeNodeV()
// - TreeNodeEx()
// - TreeNodeExV()
// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal]
// - TreePush()
// - TreePop()
// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
// - SetNextItemOpen()
// - CollapsingHeader()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
	const bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
	const bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
	const bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
	const bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, const va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
        return true;

    // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use the SetNextItemOpen function)
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;

    bool is_open;
    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen)
    {
        if (g.NextItemData.OpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
        {
            is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
            storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
        }
        else
        {
            // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
            const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
            if (stored_value == -1)
            {
                is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
                storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
            }
            else
            {
                is_open = stored_value != 0;
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
    }

    // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
    // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef) < g.LogDepthToExpand)
        is_open = true;

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(const ImGuiID id, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
    const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0.0f);

    if (!label_end)
        label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);

    // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
    const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2), label_size.y + padding.y*2);
    ImRect frame_bb;
    frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
    frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
    frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height;
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect
        // (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f)
        frame_bb.Min.x -= (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
        frame_bb.Max.x += (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
    }

    const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x*3 : padding.x*2);               // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
    const float text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);                    // Latch before ItemSize changes it
    const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x*2 : 0.0f);    // Include collapser
    ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y);
    ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), text_offset_y);

    // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
    ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb;
    if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0)
        interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f;
    
    // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
    // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
    // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
    const bool is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0;
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(id, flags);
    if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

	const bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
    window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
    window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = frame_bb;

    if (!item_add)
    {
        if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
            TreePushOverrideID(id);
        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
        return is_open;
    }

    // Flags that affects opening behavior:
    // - 0 (default) .................... single-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick .............. double-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnArrow .................... single-click on arrow to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick|OpenOnArrow .. single-click on arrow or double-click anywhere to open
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers;
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : 0);
    if (!is_leaf)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;

	const bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0;
    const bool was_selected = selected;

    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    bool toggled = false;
    if (!is_leaf)
    {
        if (pressed)
        {
            toggled = !(flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) || (g.NavActivateId == id);
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
                toggled |= IsMouseHoveringRect(interact_bb.Min, ImVec2(interact_bb.Min.x + text_offset_x, interact_bb.Max.y)) && (!g.NavDisableMouseHover);
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
                toggled |= g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0];
            if (g.DragDropActive && is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
                toggled = false;
        }

        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }

        if (toggled)
        {
            is_open = !is_open;
            window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
        }
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // In this branch, TreeNodeBehavior() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
	constexpr ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin;
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed type
        const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.60f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
        else // Leaf without bullet, left-adjusted text
            text_pos.x -= text_offset_x;
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton)
            frame_bb.Max.x -= g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x;
        if (g.LogEnabled)
        {
            // NB: '##' is normally used to hide text (as a library-wide feature), so we need to specify the text range to make sure the ## aren't stripped out here.
			constexpr char log_prefix[] = "\n##";
			constexpr char log_suffix[] = "##";
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_prefix, log_prefix+3);
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_suffix, log_suffix+2);
        }
        else
        {
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Unframed typed for tree nodes
        if (hovered || selected)
        {
            const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
            RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, false);
            RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
        }
        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.5f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
        else if (!is_leaf)
            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, ">");
        RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
    }

    if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        TreePushOverrideID(id);
    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
    return is_open;
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(str_id ? str_id : "#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(ptr_id ? ptr_id : (const void*)"#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePushOverrideID(const ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
}

void ImGui::TreePop()
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    Unindent();

    window->DC.TreeDepth--;
	const ImU32 tree_depth_mask = (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

    // Handle Left arrow to move to parent tree node (when ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere is enabled)
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
        if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask & tree_depth_mask))
        {
            SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer);
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    window->DC.TreeMayJumpToParentOnPopMask &= tree_depth_mask - 1;

    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
    PopID();
}

// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

// Set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
void ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(const bool is_open, const ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
        return;
    g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen;
    g.NextItemData.OpenVal = is_open;
    g.NextItemData.OpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, const ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
}

bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (p_open && !*p_open)
        return false;

	const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader | (p_open ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton : 0);
	const bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags, label);
    if (p_open)
    {
        // Create a small overlapping close button
        // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
        // FIXME: CloseButton can overlap into text, need find a way to clip the text somehow.
		const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
		const ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
		const float button_size = g.FontSize;
		const float button_x = ImMax(window->DC.LastItemRect.Min.x, window->DC.LastItemRect.Max.x - g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f - button_size);
		const float button_y = window->DC.LastItemRect.Min.y;
        if (CloseButton(window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id + 1)), ImVec2(button_x, button_y)))
            *p_open = false;
        last_item_backup.Restore();
    }

    return is_open;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Selectable()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##dummy") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, const ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns) // FIXME-OPT: Avoid if vertically clipped.
        PushColumnsBackground();

	const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
	const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
	const ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
	const ImRect bb_inner(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(size);

    // Fill horizontal space.
	const ImVec2 window_padding = window->WindowPadding;
	const float max_x = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? GetWindowContentRegionMax().x : GetContentRegionMax().x;
	const float w_draw = ImMax(label_size.x, window->Pos.x + max_x - window_padding.x - pos.x);
	const ImVec2 size_draw((size_arg.x != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth)) ? size_arg.x : w_draw, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : size.y);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size_draw);
    if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth))
        bb.Max.x += window_padding.x;

    // Selectables are tightly packed together so we extend the box to cover spacing between selectable.
    const float spacing_x = style.ItemSpacing.x;
    const float spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y;
    const float spacing_L = (float)(int)(spacing_x * 0.50f);
    const float spacing_U = (float)(int)(spacing_y * 0.50f);
    bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
    bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
    bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L);
    bb.Max.y += (spacing_y - spacing_U);

    bool item_add;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
    {
		const ImGuiItemFlags backup_item_flags = window->DC.ItemFlags;
        window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
        item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
        window->DC.ItemFlags = backup_item_flags;
    }
    else
    {
        item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
    }
    if (!item_add)
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
            PopColumnsBackground();
        return false;
    }

    // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
        selected = false;

    const bool was_selected = selected;
    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);

    // Update NavId when clicking or when Hovering (this doesn't happen on most widgets), so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard
    if (pressed || (hovered && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover)))
    {
        if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
        {
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
            SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
        }
    }
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // In this branch, Selectable() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;

    // Render
    if (held && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawHoveredWhenHeld))
        hovered = true;
    if (hovered || selected)
    {
        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
        RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
    }

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
    {
        PopColumnsBackground();
        bb.Max.x -= (GetContentRegionMax().x - max_x);
    }

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    RenderTextClipped(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb);
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PopStyleColor();

    // Automatically close popups
    if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
        CloseCurrentPopup();

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags);
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, const ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
    {
        *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ListBox()
// - ListBoxHeader()
// - ListBoxFooter()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// FIXME: This is an old API. We should redesign some of it, rename ListBoxHeader->BeginListBox, ListBoxFooter->EndListBox
// and promote using them over existing ListBox() functions, similarly to change with combo boxes.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called BeginListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
// Helper to calculate the size of a listbox and display a label on the right.
// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, PushItemWidth(-1) and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
	const ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.4f + style.ItemSpacing.y);
	const auto frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
	const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
	const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    window->DC.LastItemRect = bb; // Forward storage for ListBoxFooter.. dodgy.
    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();

    if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max))
    {
        ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
        ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
        return false;
    }

    BeginGroup();
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
    return true;
}

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    // Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
    // We add +25% worth of item height to allow the user to see at a glance if there are more items up/down, without looking at the scrollbar.
    // We don't add this extra bit if items_count <= height_in_items. It is slightly dodgy, because it means a dynamic list of items will make the widget resize occasionally when it crosses that size.
    // I am expecting that someone will come and complain about this behavior in a remote future, then we can advise on a better solution.
    if (height_in_items < 0)
        height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
	const float height_in_items_f = (height_in_items < items_count) ? (height_in_items + 0.25f) : (height_in_items + 0.00f);

    // We include ItemSpacing.y so that a list sized for the exact number of items doesn't make a scrollbar appears. We could also enforce that by passing a flag to BeginChild().
    ImVec2 size;
    size.x = 0.0f;
    size.y = ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    return ListBoxHeader(label, size);
}

// FIXME: In principle this function should be called EndListBox(). We should rename it after re-evaluating if we want to keep the same signature.
void ImGui::ListBoxFooter()
{
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = GetCurrentWindow()->ParentWindow;
    const ImRect bb = parent_window->DC.LastItemRect;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();

    EndChildFrame();

    // Redeclare item size so that it includes the label (we have stored the full size in LastItemRect)
    // We call SameLine() to restore DC.CurrentLine* data
    SameLine();
    parent_window->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    EndGroup();
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], const int items_count, const int height_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, const int items_count, const int height_in_items)
{
    if (!ListBoxHeader(label, items_count, height_in_items))
        return false;

    // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different or variable sizes you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    ImGuiListClipper clipper(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
    while (clipper.Step())
        for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
        {
            const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
            const char* item_text;
            if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
                item_text = "*Unknown item*";

            PushID(i);
            if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
            {
                *current_item = i;
                value_changed = true;
            }
            if (item_selected)
                SetItemDefaultFocus();
            PopID();
        }
    ListBoxFooter();
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - PlotEx() [Internal]
// - PlotLines()
// - PlotHistogram()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::PlotEx(const ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, const int values_count, const int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    if (frame_size.x == 0.0f)
        frame_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
    if (frame_size.y == 0.0f)
        frame_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
        return;
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);

    // Determine scale from values if not specified
    if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
    {
        float v_min = FLT_MAX;
        float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
        for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
        {
            const float v = values_getter(data, i);
            if (v != v) // Ignore NaN values
                continue;
            v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
            v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
        }
        if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
            scale_min = v_min;
        if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
            scale_max = v_max;
    }

    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);

    const int values_count_min = (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? 2 : 1;
    if (values_count >= values_count_min)
    {
		const int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
		const int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);

        // Tooltip on hover
        int v_hovered = -1;
        if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
        {
            const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
            const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
            IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);

            const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx+1, v1);
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
            v_hovered = v_idx;
        }

        const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
        const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));

		const float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
        float t0 = 0.0f;
		auto tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );                       // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
		const float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (-scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f);   // Where does the zero line stands

        const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
        const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);

        for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
        {
            const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
            const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
            IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
            const auto tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );

            // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
            ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
            ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
            {
                window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
            {
                if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
                    pos1.x -= 1.0f;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }

            t0 = t1;
            tp0 = tp1;
        }
    }

    // Text overlay
    if (overlay_text)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
}

struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
{
    const float* Values;
    int Stride;

    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, const int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
};

static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, const int idx)
{
	const auto plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
    const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
    return v;
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, const int values_count, const int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, const float scale_min, const float scale_max,
                      const ImVec2 graph_size, const int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, const int values_count, const int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, const float scale_min,
                      const float scale_max, const ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, const int values_count, const int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, const float scale_min, const float scale_max,
                          const ImVec2 graph_size, const int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, const int values_count, const int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, const float scale_min,
                          const float scale_max, const ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
// Those is not very useful, legacy API.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - Value()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, const bool b)
{
    Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, const int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, const unsigned int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, const float v, const char* float_format)
{
    if (float_format)
    {
        char fmt[64];
        ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
        Text(fmt, prefix, v);
    }
    else
    {
        Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
    }
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal]
// - BeginMainMenuBar()
// - EndMainMenuBar()
// - BeginMenuBar()
// - EndMenuBar()
// - BeginMenu()
// - EndMenu()
// - MenuItem()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Helpers for internal use
ImGuiMenuColumns::ImGuiMenuColumns()
{
    Spacing = Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    memset(Pos, 0, sizeof(Pos));
    memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
}

void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(const int count, const float spacing, const bool clear)
{
    IM_ASSERT(count == IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos));
    IM_UNUSED(count);
    Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    Spacing = spacing;
    if (clear)
        memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos); i++)
    {
        if (i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f)
            Width += Spacing;
        Pos[i] = (float)(int)Width;
        Width += NextWidths[i];
        NextWidths[i] = 0.0f;
    }
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(const float w0, const float w1, const float w2) // not using va_arg because they promote float to double
{
    NextWidth = 0.0f;
    NextWidths[0] = ImMax(NextWidths[0], w0);
    NextWidths[1] = ImMax(NextWidths[1], w1);
    NextWidths[2] = ImMax(NextWidths[2], w2);
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos); i++)
        NextWidth += NextWidths[i] + ((i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f) ? Spacing : 0.0f);
    return ImMax(Width, NextWidth);
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcExtraSpace(const float avail_w)
{
    return ImMax(0.0f, avail_w - Width);
}

// For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
    SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
    SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y + g.FontBaseSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y));
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0,0));
	constexpr ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
	const bool is_open = Begin("##MainMenuBar", NULL, window_flags) && BeginMenuBar();
    PopStyleVar(2);
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    if (!is_open)
    {
        End();
        return false;
    }
    return true; //-V1020
}

void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
{
    EndMenuBar();

    // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
    // FIXME: With this strategy we won't be able to restore a NULL focus.
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == 0 && !g.NavAnyRequest)
        FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(g.NavWindow, NULL);

    End();
}

// FIXME: Provided a rectangle perhaps e.g. a BeginMenuBarEx() could be used anywhere..
// Currently the main responsibility of this function being to setup clip-rect + horizontal layout + menu navigation layer.
// Ideally we also want this to be responsible for claiming space out of the main window scrolling rectangle, in which case ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar will become unnecessary.
// Then later the same system could be used for multiple menu-bars, scrollbars, side-bars.
bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore
    PushID("##menubar");

    // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
    // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
	const ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
    ImRect clip_rect(ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.x + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize + 0.5f), ImFloor(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowRounding) + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Max.y + 0.5f));
    clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
    PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);

    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
    AlignTextToFramePadding();
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
    if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
		const ImGuiWindow * nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
        while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
        if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
        {
            // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
            // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth the hassle/cost)
			constexpr ImGuiNavLayer layer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
            IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext & (1 << layer)); // Sanity check
            FocusWindow(window);
            SetNavIDWithRectRel(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, window->NavRectRel[layer]);
            g.NavLayer = layer;
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
            g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    PopClipRect();
    PopID();
    window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->MenuBarRect().Min.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
    window->DC.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false;
    EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask = (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, const bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

	const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    bool pressed;
    bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
	const bool menuset_is_open = !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back());
    ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = window;  // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent)

    // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu,
    // However the final position is going to be different! It is choosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup().
    // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering.
    ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
        // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
        // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
		const float w = label_size.x;
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu inside a menu
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
		const float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, 0.0f, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback to next frame
		const float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
		const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled);
        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), text_col, ImGuiDir_Right);
    }

    const bool hovered = enabled && ItemHoverable(window->DC.LastItemRect, id);
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;

    bool want_open = false;
    bool want_close = false;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        // Close menu when not hovering it anymore unless we are moving roughly in the direction of the menu
        // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
        bool moving_toward_other_child_menu = false;

		const ImGuiWindow * child_menu_window = (g.BeginPopupStack.Size < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].SourceWindow == window) ? g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].Window : NULL;
        if (g.HoveredWindow == window && child_menu_window != NULL && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        {
            // FIXME-DPI: Values should be derived from a master "scale" factor.
			const ImRect next_window_rect = child_menu_window->Rect();
            ImVec2 ta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta;
            ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
            ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
			const float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, 5.0f, 30.0f);    // add a bit of extra slack.
            ta.x += (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f; // to avoid numerical issues
            tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -100.0f);                // triangle is maximum 200 high to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus // FIXME: Multiply by fb_scale?
            tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +100.0f);
            moving_toward_other_child_menu = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
            //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_within_opened_triangle ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); // [DEBUG]
        }
        if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && !moving_toward_other_child_menu)
            want_close = true;

        if (!menu_is_open && hovered && pressed) // Click to open
            want_open = true;
        else if (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_toward_other_child_menu) // Hover to open
            want_open = true;

        if (g.NavActivateId == id)
        {
            want_close = menu_is_open;
            want_open = !menu_is_open;
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu bar
        if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
        {
            want_close = true;
            want_open = menu_is_open = false;
        }
        else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
        {
            want_open = true;
        }
        else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
        want_close = true;
    if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id))
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));

    if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size)
    {
        // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
        OpenPopup(label);
        return false;
    }

    menu_is_open |= want_open;
    if (want_open)
        OpenPopup(label);

    if (menu_is_open)
    {
        // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
        SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
        ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
        if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
        menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
    }

    return menu_is_open;
}

void ImGui::EndMenu()
{
    // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close ourselves (the _parent_ menu).
    // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
    // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow == window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
    {
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
        NavMoveRequestCancel();
    }

    EndPopup();
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, const bool selected, const bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiStyle & style = g.Style;
	const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
	const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // We've been using the equivalent of ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover on all Selectable() since early Nav system days (commit 43ee5d73),
    // but I am unsure whether this should be kept at all. For now moved it to be an opt-in feature used by menus only.
	const ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover | (enabled ? 0 : ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled);
    bool pressed;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
        // Note that in this situation we render neither the shortcut neither the selected tick mark
		const float w = label_size.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
		const ImVec2 shortcut_size = shortcut ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
		const float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, shortcut_size.x, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback for next frame
		const float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        if (shortcut_size.x > 0.0f)
        {
            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[1] + extra_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
            PopStyleColor();
        }
        if (selected)
            RenderCheckMark(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), g.FontSize  * 0.866f);
    }

    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->DC.LastItemId, label, window->DC.ItemFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, const bool enabled)
{
    if (MenuItem(label, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
    {
        if (p_selected)
            *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [BETA API] API may evolve! This code has been extracted out of the Docking branch,
// and some of the construct which are not used in Master may be left here to facilitate merging.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabBar()
// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal]
// - EndTabBar()
// - TabBarLayout() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal]
// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal]
// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal]
// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollClamp()v
// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal]
// - TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder() [Internal]
// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal]
// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

namespace ImGui
{
    static void             TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
    static ImU32            TabBarCalcTabID(const ImGuiTabBar * tab_bar, const char* label);
    static float            TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
    static float            TabBarScrollClamp(const ImGuiTabBar * tab_bar, float scrolling);
    static void             TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem * tab);
    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
}

ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar()
{
    ID = 0;
    SelectedTabId = NextSelectedTabId = VisibleTabId = 0;
    CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1;
    LastTabContentHeight = 0.0f;
    OffsetMax = OffsetMaxIdeal = OffsetNextTab = 0.0f;
    ScrollingAnim = ScrollingTarget = ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
    Flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None;
    ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
    ReorderRequestDir = 0;
    WantLayout = VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;
    LastTabItemIdx = -1;
}

static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
	const auto a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs;
	const auto b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs;
    return (int)(a->Offset - b->Offset);
}

static ImGuiTabBar* GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(const ImGuiPtrOrIndex& ref)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return ref.Ptr ? (ImGuiTabBar*)ref.Ptr : g.TabBars.GetByIndex(ref.Index);
}

static ImGuiPtrOrIndex GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    if (g.TabBars.Contains(tab_bar))
        return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(g.TabBars.GetIndex(tab_bar));
    return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(tab_bar);
}

bool    ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, const ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

	const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
	const auto tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    tab_bar->ID = id;
    return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused);
}

bool    ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID);

    // Add to stack
    g.CurrentTabBarStack.push_back(GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(tab_bar));
    g.CurrentTabBar = tab_bar;

    if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount)
    {
        //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("BeginTabBarEx already called this frame\n", g.FrameCount);
        IM_ASSERT(0);
        return true;
    }

    // When toggling back from ordered to manually-reorderable, shuffle tabs to enforce the last visible order.
    // Otherwise, the most recently inserted tabs would move at the end of visible list which can be a little too confusing or magic for the user.
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1 && tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible != -1)
        ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByVisibleOffset);

    // Flags
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;

    tab_bar->Flags = flags;
    tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab()
    tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;
    tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding;

    // Layout
    ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->OffsetMaxIdeal, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()));
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x;

    // Draw separator
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive);
    const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
    {
        const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
    }
    return true;
}

void    ImGui::EndTabBar()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar != NULL && "Mismatched BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar()!");
        return; // FIXME-ERRORHANDLING
    }
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);

    // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed().
    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing)
        tab_bar->LastTabContentHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, 0.0f);
    else
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->LastTabContentHeight;

    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        PopID();

    g.CurrentTabBarStack.pop_back();
    g.CurrentTabBar = g.CurrentTabBarStack.empty() ? NULL : GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(g.CurrentTabBarStack.back());
}

// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab()
// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions.
static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    tab_bar->WantLayout = false;

    // Garbage collect
    int tab_dst_n = 0;
    for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++)
    {
		const ImGuiTabItem * tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
        if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible)
        {
            if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
                tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
            continue;
        }
        if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n)
            tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
        tab_dst_n++;
    }
    if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n)
        tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n);

    // Setup next selected tab
    ImGuiID scroll_track_selected_tab_id = 0;
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId)
    {
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
        scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    }

    // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot).
    if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0)
    {
        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId))
        {
            // IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools
			const int tab2_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir;
            if (tab2_order >= 0 && tab2_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
            {
                ImGuiTabItem* tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order];
				const ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1;
                *tab1 = *tab2;
                *tab2 = item_tmp;
                if (tab2->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
                    scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab2->ID;
                tab1 = tab2 = NULL;
            }
            if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings)
                MarkIniSettingsDirty();
        }
        tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
    }

    // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!)
    const bool tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0;
    if (tab_list_popup_button)
        if (const ImGuiTabItem * tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;

    // Compute ideal widths
    g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size);
    float width_total_contents = 0.0f;
	const ImGuiTabItem * most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
    bool found_selected_tab_id = false;
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible);

        if (most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
            most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
        if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
            found_selected_tab_id = true;

        // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar.
        // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet,
        // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active window.
        const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
        const bool has_close_button = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) ? false : true;
        tab->WidthContents = TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, has_close_button).x;

        width_total_contents += (tab_n > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f) + tab->WidthContents;

        // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down
        g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index = tab_n;
        g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width = tab->WidthContents;
    }

    // Compute width
	constexpr float initial_offset_x = 0.0f; // g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    const float width_avail = ImMax(tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - initial_offset_x, 0.0f);
	const float width_excess = (width_avail < width_total_contents) ? (width_total_contents - width_avail) : 0.0f;
    if (width_excess > 0.0f && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
    {
        // If we don't have enough room, resize down the largest tabs first
        ShrinkWidths(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Data, g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Size, width_excess);
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
            tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index].Width = (float)(int)g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width;
    }
    else
    {
        const float tab_max_width = TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
        {
            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
            tab->Width = ImMin(tab->WidthContents, tab_max_width);
            IM_ASSERT(tab->Width > 0.0f);
        }
    }

    // Layout all active tabs
    float offset_x = initial_offset_x;
    float offset_x_ideal = offset_x;
    tab_bar->OffsetNextTab = offset_x; // This is used by non-reorderable tab bar where the submission order is always honored.
    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
    {
        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
        tab->Offset = offset_x;
        if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID)
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab->ID;
        offset_x += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
        offset_x_ideal += tab->WidthContents + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    }
    tab_bar->OffsetMax = ImMax(offset_x - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f);
    tab_bar->OffsetMaxIdeal = ImMax(offset_x_ideal - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f);

    // Horizontal scrolling buttons
    const bool scrolling_buttons = (tab_bar->OffsetMax > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons) && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
    if (scrolling_buttons)
        if (const ImGuiTabItem * tab_to_select = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Max.x!
            scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;

    // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one
    if (found_selected_tab_id == false)
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL)
        scroll_track_selected_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID;

    // Lock in visible tab
    tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
    tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;

    // Update scrolling
    if (scroll_track_selected_tab_id)
        if (ImGuiTabItem* scroll_track_selected_tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab_id))
            TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_track_selected_tab);
    tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget);
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget)
    {
        // Scrolling speed adjust itself so we can always reach our target in 1/3 seconds.
        // Teleport if we are aiming far off the visible line
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, 70.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, ImFabs(tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim) / 0.3f);
        const bool teleport = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) || (tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility > 10.0f * g.FontSize);
        tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = teleport ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, g.IO.DeltaTime * tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed);
    }
    else
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
    }

    // Clear name buffers
    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
        tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0);
}

// Dockables uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack.
static ImU32   ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(const ImGuiTabBar * tab_bar, const char* label)
{
    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode)
    {
		const ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(label);
        KeepAliveID(id);
        return id;
    }
    else
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
        return window->GetID(label);
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize * 20.0f;
}

ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (tab_id != 0)
        for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
            if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id)
                return &tab_bar->Tabs[n];
    return NULL;
}

// The *TabId fields be already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless.
void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiID tab_id)
{
    if (const ImGuiTabItem * tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
        tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab);
    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id)      { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; }
    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id)     { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; }
    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; }
}

// Called on manual closure attempt
void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
{
    if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
    {
        // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure.
        // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure
        tab->LastFrameVisible = -1;
        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
    }
    else if ((tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID) && (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
    {
        // Actually select before expecting closure
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID;
    }
}

static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(const ImGuiTabBar * tab_bar, float scrolling)
{
    scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->OffsetMax - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth());
    return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f);
}

static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem * tab)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const float margin = g.FontSize * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar)
	const int order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab);
	const float tab_x1 = tab->Offset + (order > 0 ? -margin : 0.0f);
	const float tab_x2 = tab->Offset + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size ? margin : 1.0f);
    tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f;
    if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1 || (tab_x2 - tab_x1 >= tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth()))
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim - tab_x2, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1;
    }
    else if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget < tab_x2 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth())
    {
        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax((tab_x1 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth()) - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
    }
}

void ImGui::TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, const int dir)
{
    IM_ASSERT(dir == -1 || dir == +1);
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID;
    tab_bar->ReorderRequestDir = (ImS8)dir;
}

static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    const float scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f;

    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    //window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));

    const ImRect avail_bar_rect = tab_bar->BarRect;
	const bool want_clip_rect = !avail_bar_rect.Contains(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(scrolling_buttons_width, 0.0f)));
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PushClipRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max + ImVec2(g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, 0.0f), true);

    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;

    int select_dir = 0;
    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;

    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
    const float backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay;
    const float backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = -1;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
        select_dir = +1;
    PopStyleColor(2);
    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate;
    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay;

    if (want_clip_rect)
        PopClipRect();

    if (select_dir != 0)
        if (const ImGuiTabItem * tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
        {
			const int selected_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab_item);
			const int target_order = selected_order + select_dir;
            tab_to_select = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order]; // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible
        }
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f;

    return tab_to_select;
}

static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size
    const float tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
    tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width;

    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
	const bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview);
    PopStyleColor(2);

    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;
    if (open)
    {
        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
        {
            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
            const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
            if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID))
                tab_to_select = tab;
        }
        EndCombo();
    }

    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
    return tab_to_select;
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [BETA API] API may evolve! This code has been extracted out of the Docking branch,
// and some of the construct which are not used in Master may be left here to facilitate merging.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - BeginTabItem()
// - EndTabItem()
// - TabItemEx() [Internal]
// - SetTabItemClosed()
// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal]
// - TabItemBackground() [Internal]
// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal]
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

bool    ImGui::BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open, const ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar && "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return false; // FIXME-ERRORHANDLING
    }
	const bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags);
    if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
    {
		const ImGuiTabItem * tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
        PushOverrideID(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label)
    }
    return ret;
}

void    ImGui::EndTabItem()
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
    if (tab_bar == NULL)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar != NULL && "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0);
	const ImGuiTabItem * tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
        window->IDStack.pop_back();
}

bool    ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
{
    // Layout whole tab bar if not already done
    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);

    // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render. We make a dummy call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID.
    if (p_open && !*p_open)
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
        PopItemFlag();
        return false;
    }

    // Calculate tab contents size
    ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, p_open != NULL);

    // Acquire tab data
    ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id);
    bool tab_is_new = false;
    if (tab == NULL)
    {
        tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem());
        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back();
        tab->ID = id;
        tab->Width = size.x;
        tab_is_new = true;
    }
    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (short)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab);
    tab->WidthContents = size.x;

    if (p_open == NULL)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;

    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    const bool tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0;
    const bool tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
    tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
    tab->Flags = flags;

    // Append name with zero-terminator
    tab->NameOffset = tab_bar->TabsNames.size();
    tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1);

    // If we are not reorderable, always reset offset based on submission order.
    // (We already handled layout and sizing using the previous known order, but sizing is not affected by order!)
    if (!tab_appearing && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))
    {
        tab->Offset = tab_bar->OffsetNextTab;
        tab_bar->OffsetNextTab += tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    }

    // Update selected tab
    if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0)
        if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0)
            tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;  // New tabs gets activated
    if ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && (tab_bar->SelectedTabId != id)) // SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;

    // Lock visibility
    bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id);
    if (tab_contents_visible)
        tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true;

    // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches
    if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing)
        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs))
            tab_contents_visible = true;

    if (tab_appearing && !(tab_bar_appearing && !tab_is_new))
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id);
        PopItemFlag();
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id)
        tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount;

    // Backup current layout position
    const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;

    // Layout
    size.x = tab->Width;
    window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2((float)(int)tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
	const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);

    // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of vertical animation)
	const bool want_clip_rect = (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x) || (bb.Max.x > tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x);
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, bb.Max.y), true);

	const ImVec2 backup_cursor_max_pos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
    ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = backup_cursor_max_pos;

    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
    {
        if (want_clip_rect)
            PopClipRect();
        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
        return tab_contents_visible;
    }

    // Click to Select a tab
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
    if (g.DragDropActive)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
    bool hovered, held;
	const bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (pressed)
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
    hovered |= (g.HoveredId == id);

    // Allow the close button to overlap unless we are dragging (in which case we don't want any overlapping tabs to be hovered)
    if (!held)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // Drag and drop: re-order tabs
    if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0))
    {
        if (!g.DragDropActive && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))
        {
            // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
            if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x)
            {
                if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
                    TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, -1);
            }
            else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x)
            {
                if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)
                    TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder(tab_bar, tab, +1);
            }
        }
    }

#if 0
    if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f && bb.GetWidth() < tab->WidthContents)
    {
        // Enlarge tab display when hovering
        bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + (float)(int)ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->WidthContents, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f));
        display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
        TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
    }
#endif

    // Render tab shape
    ImDrawList* display_draw_list = window->DrawList;
    const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive) : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused));
    TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col);
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);

    // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget.
    const bool hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup);
    if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)))
        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;

    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;

    // Render tab label, process close button
    const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? window->GetID((void*)((intptr_t)id + 1)) : 0;
	const bool just_closed = TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_bar->FramePadding, label, id, close_button_id);
    if (just_closed && p_open != NULL)
    {
        *p_open = false;
        TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab);
    }

    // Restore main window position so user can draw there
    if (want_clip_rect)
        PopClipRect();
    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;

    // Tooltip (FIXME: Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer)
    // We test IsItemHovered() to discard e.g. when another item is active or drag and drop over the tab bar (which g.HoveredId ignores)
    if (g.HoveredId == id && !held && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > 0.50f && IsItemHovered())
        if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip))
            SetTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label);

    return tab_contents_visible;
}

// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed.
// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() after BeginTabBar() and before any call to BeginTabItem()
void    ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(const char* label)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar && !(g.CurrentTabBar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
    if (is_within_manual_tab_bar)
    {
        ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->WantLayout);         // Needs to be called AFTER BeginTabBar() and BEFORE the first call to BeginTabItem()
		const ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label);
        TabBarRemoveTab(tab_bar, tab_id);
    }
}

ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, const bool has_close_button)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
	auto size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
    if (has_close_button)
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle.
    else
        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f;
    return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y);
}

void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, const ImU32 col)
{
    // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it.
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const float width = bb.GetWidth();
    IM_UNUSED(flags);
    IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
    const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin(g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
    const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
    const float y2 = bb.Max.y - 1.0f;
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2));
    draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
    if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f)
    {
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9);
        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12);
        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2));
        draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), false, g.Style.TabBorderSize);
    }
}

// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic
// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter.
bool ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, const ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, const ImGuiID tab_id,
                                       const ImGuiID close_button_id)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f)
        return false;

    // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker
	const auto TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER = "*";
    ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y);
    if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)
    {
        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= CalcTextSize(TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, false).x;
		const ImVec2 unsaved_marker_pos(ImMin(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x + label_size.x + 2, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x), bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y + (float)(int)(-g.FontSize * 0.25f));
        RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, unsaved_marker_pos, bb.Max - frame_padding, TAB_UNSAVED_MARKER, NULL, NULL);
    }
	const ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb;

    // Close Button
    // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap()
    //  'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button
    //  'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button
    //  'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false
    bool close_button_pressed = false;
    bool close_button_visible = false;
    if (close_button_id != 0)
        if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id)
            close_button_visible = true;
    if (close_button_visible)
    {
		const ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
        const float close_button_sz = g.FontSize;
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, frame_padding);
        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x * 2.0f - close_button_sz, bb.Min.y)))
            close_button_pressed = true;
        PopStyleVar();
        last_item_backup.Restore();

        // Close with middle mouse button
        if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2))
            close_button_pressed = true;

        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_sz;
    }

	const float ellipsis_max_x = close_button_visible ? text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x : bb.Max.x - 1.0f;
    RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x, ellipsis_max_x, label, NULL, &label_size);

    return close_button_pressed;
}


//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.
// In the current version, Columns are very weak. Needs to be replaced with a more full-featured system.
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// - GetColumnIndex()
// - GetColumnCount()
// - GetColumnOffset()
// - GetColumnWidth()
// - SetColumnOffset()
// - SetColumnWidth()
// - PushColumnClipRect() [Internal]
// - PushColumnsBackground() [Internal]
// - PopColumnsBackground() [Internal]
// - FindOrCreateColumns() [Internal]
// - GetColumnsID() [Internal]
// - BeginColumns()
// - NextColumn()
// - EndColumns()
// - Columns()
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Current : 0;
}

int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Count : 1;
}

float ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiColumns* columns, const float offset_norm)
{
    return offset_norm * (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
}

float ImGui::GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiColumns* columns, const float offset)
{
    return offset / (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
}

static constexpr float COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH = 4.0f;

static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(const ImGuiColumns * columns, const int column_index)
{
    // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
    // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));

    float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH - window->Pos.x;
    x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
    if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
        x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);

    return x;
}

float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns == NULL)
        return 0.0f;

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX, t);
    return x_offset;
}

static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiColumns* columns, int column_index, const bool before_resize = false)
{
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

    float offset_norm;
    if (before_resize)
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
    else
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    return ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, offset_norm);
}

float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns == NULL)
        return GetContentRegionAvail().x;

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    return GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
}

void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
	const ImGuiWindow * window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count-1);
    const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;

    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
        offset = ImMin(offset, columns->OffMaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
    columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = GetColumnNormFromOffset(columns, offset - columns->OffMinX);

    if (preserve_width)
        SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
}

void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, const float width)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
	const ImGuiColumns * columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
}

void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

	const ImGuiColumnData * column = &columns->Columns[column_index];
    PushClipRect(column->ClipRect.Min, column->ClipRect.Max, false);
}

// Get into the columns background draw command (which is generally the same draw command as before we called BeginColumns)
void ImGui::PushColumnsBackground()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
	const ImGuiColumns * columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns->Count == 1)
        return;
    window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
	const int cmd_size = window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size;
    PushClipRect(columns->HostClipRect.Min, columns->HostClipRect.Max, false);
    IM_UNUSED(cmd_size);
    IM_ASSERT(cmd_size == window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size); // Being in channel 0 this should not have created an ImDrawCmd
}

void ImGui::PopColumnsBackground()
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
	const ImGuiColumns * columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns->Count == 1)
        return;
    window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current + 1);
    PopClipRect();
}

ImGuiColumns* ImGui::FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImGuiID id)
{
    // We have few columns per window so for now we don't need bother much with turning this into a faster lookup.
    for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
        if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
            return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];

    window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiColumns());
    ImGuiColumns* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
    columns->ID = id;
    return columns;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetColumnsID(const char* str_id, const int columns_count)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
    // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
    PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
	const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
    PopID();

    return id;
}

void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, const int columns_count, const ImGuiColumnsFlags flags)
{
	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL); // Nested columns are currently not supported

    // Acquire storage for the columns set
	const ImGuiID id = GetColumnsID(str_id, columns_count);
    ImGuiColumns* columns = FindOrCreateColumns(window, id);
    IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
    columns->Current = 0;
    columns->Count = columns_count;
    columns->Flags = flags;
    window->DC.CurrentColumns = columns;

    columns->HostCursorPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    columns->HostCursorMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
    columns->HostClipRect = window->ClipRect;
    columns->HostWorkRect = window->WorkRect;

    // Set state for first column
    // We aim so that the right-most column will have the same clipping width as other after being clipped by parent ClipRect
    const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
    const float half_clip_extend_x = ImFloor(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize));
    const float max_1 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + column_padding - ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    const float max_2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + half_clip_extend_x;
    columns->OffMinX = window->DC.Indent.x - column_padding + ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    columns->OffMaxX = ImMax(ImMin(max_1, max_2) - window->Pos.x, columns->OffMinX + 1.0f);
    columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;

    // Clear data if columns count changed
    if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
        columns->Columns.resize(0);

    // Initialize default widths
    columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
    if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
    {
        columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
        {
            ImGuiColumnData column;
            column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
            columns->Columns.push_back(column);
        }
    }

    for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
    {
        // Compute clipping rectangle
        ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
		const float clip_x1 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n));
		const float clip_x2 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
        column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
        column->ClipRect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
    }

    if (columns->Count > 1)
    {
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(1 + columns->Count);
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
        PushColumnClipRect(0);
    }

    // We don't generally store Indent.x inside ColumnsOffset because it may be manipulated by the user.
	const float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
	const float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
	const float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
}

void ImGui::NextColumn()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL)
        return;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;

    if (columns->Count == 1)
    {
        window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
        IM_ASSERT(columns->Current == 0);
        return;
    }
    PopItemWidth();
    PopClipRect();

    const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    if (++columns->Current < columns->Count)
    {
        // Columns 1+ ignore IndentX (by canceling it out)
        // FIXME-COLUMNS: Unnecessary, could be locked?
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + column_padding;
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current + 1);
    }
    else
    {
        // New row/line
        // Column 0 honor IndentX
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
        columns->Current = 0;
        columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
    }
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
    window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;

    PushColumnClipRect(columns->Current);     // FIXME-COLUMNS: Could it be an overwrite?

    // FIXME-COLUMNS: Share code with BeginColumns() - move code on columns setup.
	const float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
	const float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
	const float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
}

void ImGui::EndColumns()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    ImGuiColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    PopItemWidth();
    if (columns->Count > 1)
    {
        PopClipRect();
        window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();
    }

    const ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = columns->Flags;
    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
        window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->HostCursorMaxPosX;  // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent

    // Draw columns borders and handle resize
    // The IsBeingResized flag ensure we preserve pre-resize columns width so back-and-forth are not lossy
    bool is_being_resized = false;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
    {
        // We clip Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.
        const float y1 = ImMax(columns->HostCursorPosY, window->ClipRect.Min.y);
        const float y2 = ImMin(window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y);
        int dragging_column = -1;
        for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
        {
			const ImGuiColumnData * column = &columns->Columns[n];
			const float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
            const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
            const float column_hit_hw = COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH;
            const ImRect column_hit_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hit_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hit_hw, y2));
            KeepAliveID(column_id);
            if (IsClippedEx(column_hit_rect, column_id, false))
                continue;

            bool hovered = false, held = false;
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
            {
                ButtonBehavior(column_hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
                if (hovered || held)
                    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
                if (held && !(column->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
                    dragging_column = n;
            }

            // Draw column
            const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
            const float xi = (float)(int)x;
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, y1 + 1.0f), ImVec2(xi, y2), col);
        }

        // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
        if (dragging_column != -1)
        {
            if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
                for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
                    columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
            columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
			const float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
            SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
        }
    }
    columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;

    window->WorkRect = columns->HostWorkRect;
    window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL;
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
}

// [2018-03: This is currently the only public API, while we are working on making BeginColumns/EndColumns user-facing]
void ImGui::Columns(const int columns_count, const char* id, const bool border)
{
	const ImGuiWindow * window = GetCurrentWindow();
    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);

	const ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder);
    // flags |= ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
	const ImGuiColumns * columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
    if (columns != NULL && columns->Count == columns_count && columns->Flags == flags)
        return;

    if (columns != NULL)
        EndColumns();

    if (columns_count != 1)
        BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
}

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

// by zfedoran, https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1901

bool ImGui::BufferingBar( const char* label, const float value, const ImVec2& size_arg, const ImU32& bg_col, const ImU32& fg_col ) {
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if( window->SkipItems )
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID( label );

	const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 size = size_arg;
    size.x -= style.FramePadding.x * 2;

    const ImRect bb( pos, ImVec2( pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y ) );
    ItemSize( bb, style.FramePadding.y );
    if( !ItemAdd( bb, id ) )
        return false;

    // Render
    const float circleStart = std::max( size.x * 0.7f, size.x - 30.f );
    const float circleEnd = size.x;
    const float circleWidth = circleEnd - circleStart;

    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled( bb.Min, ImVec2( pos.x + circleStart, bb.Max.y ), bg_col );
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled( bb.Min, ImVec2( pos.x + circleStart * value, bb.Max.y ), fg_col );

    const float t = g.FrameCount * 0.1f; // g.Time;
    const float r = size.y / 2;
	constexpr float speed = 1.5f;

    const float a = speed * 0;
    const float b = speed * 0.333f;
    const float c = speed * 0.666f;

    const float o1 = ( circleWidth + r ) * ( t + a - speed * (int)( ( t + a ) / speed ) ) / speed;
    const float o2 = ( circleWidth + r ) * ( t + b - speed * (int)( ( t + b ) / speed ) ) / speed;
    const float o3 = ( circleWidth + r ) * ( t + c - speed * (int)( ( t + c ) / speed ) ) / speed;

    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled( ImVec2( pos.x + circleEnd - o1, bb.Min.y + r ), r, bg_col );
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled( ImVec2( pos.x + circleEnd - o2, bb.Min.y + r ), r, bg_col );
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled( ImVec2( pos.x + circleEnd - o3, bb.Min.y + r ), r, bg_col );

    return true;
}

bool ImGui::Spinner( const char* label, const float radius, const int thickness, const ImU32& color ) {
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if( window->SkipItems )
        return false;

	const ImGuiContext & g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID( label );

	const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
	const ImVec2 size( ( radius ) * 2, ( radius + style.FramePadding.y ) * 2 );

    const ImRect bb( pos, ImVec2( pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y ) );
    ItemSize( bb, style.FramePadding.y );
    if( !ItemAdd( bb, id ) )
        return false;

    // Render
    window->DrawList->PathClear();

	const auto progress { g.FrameCount * 0.1f };

	constexpr int num_segments = 30;
	const int start = abs( ImSin( progress * 1.8f )*( num_segments - 5 ) );

    const float a_min = IM_PI * 2.0f * ( (float)start ) / (float)num_segments;
	constexpr float a_max = IM_PI * 2.0f * ( (float)num_segments - 3 ) / (float)num_segments;

    const auto centre = ImVec2( pos.x + radius, pos.y + radius + style.FramePadding.y );

    for( int i = 0; i < num_segments; i++ ) {
        const float a = a_min + ( (float)i / (float)num_segments ) * ( a_max - a_min );
        window->DrawList->PathLineTo( ImVec2( centre.x + ImCos( a + progress * 8 ) * radius,
            centre.y + ImSin( a + progress * 8 ) * radius ) );
    }

    window->DrawList->PathStroke( color, false, thickness );

    return true;
}